UBC Publications

UBC Publications

UBC Publications

The University of British Columbia Calendar Aug 30, 1935

Item Metadata

Download

Media
calendars-1.0169786.pdf
Metadata
JSON: calendars-1.0169786.json
JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169786-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169786-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169786-rdf.json
Turtle: calendars-1.0169786-turtle.txt
N-Triples: calendars-1.0169786-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: calendars-1.0169786-source.json
Full Text
calendars-1.0169786-fulltext.txt
Citation
calendars-1.0169786.ris

Full Text

Array tBfoe (Hntesttp
OF
Sritislj Columbia
ffi=
CALENDAR
TWENTY-FIRST SESSION
1935-1936
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH   COLUMBIA
1935 CHANGES IN CALENDAR REGULATIONS
Students are -warned not to assume that regulations remain unchanged from year to year, and attention is called particularly to the following items in
this Calendar:
1. Additional   Scholarships   and   Bursaries   made   available   for
students.   Pages 39 to 50.
2. Teacher Training Course opened to graduates in Agriculture.
Conditions of admission defined.   Page 84.
3. Course leading to the Social Service Diploma extended to three
years.  Pages 84, 85.
4. Department of Bacteriology—name changed to Department of
Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine.   Page 88.
5. Fifth Year course in Forest Engineering revised.   Page 157.
6. New   course   in   Nursing    (Hospital   Administration)    offered.
Page 168.
7. Students in Applied Science repeating year will not be admitted
with any supplemental outstanding.   Page  175.
8. Teacher Training Course opened to graduates in Agriculture.
Conditions of admission defined.   Page 226.
9. Directed Reading Courses, in the Faculty of Arts and Science,
to be offered.   Page 271. ERRATA
Latin 7 deleted.    Greek   9   to   be   given   at   9   o'clock,   Monday,
Wednesday and Friday.
Latin 5 deleted.    Latin   6   to   be   given   at   9   o'clock,   Tuesday,
Thursday and Saturday.
Latin 3 deleted.    Latin   4   to   be   given   at   1   o'clock,   Monday,
Wednesday and Friday. Cfje atofoetsttp
OF
prttfef) Columbia
CALENDAR
TWENTY-FIRST SESSION
1935-1936
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH  COLUMBIA
1935  CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year        5
Visitor         7
Chancellor j      7
President :   7
The Board of Governors  '.    7
The  Senate  '  7
Officers  and  Staff      9
Historical Sketch    17
The Constitution of the University     19
Location  and  Buildings    20
Endowments and Donations ,.     22
General  Information    26
Admission to the University    29
Registration  and  Attendance    31
Fees .•    34
Medals, Scholarships, Prizes, Bursaries and Loans    39
Faculty of Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures  58
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A  63
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com.  74
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A  77
Teacher Training Course  83
Course Leading to the Social Service Diploma  84
Examinations  and Advancement  86
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine    88
" Botany    89
" " Chemistry        94
" Classics      99
" " Economics, Political Science, Commerce and Sociology 102
" " Education     110
" " English   112
" " Geology and Geography  115
" History      120
" " Mathematics  124
" " Modern   Languages     128
" Philosophy  131
" " Physics    134
" Zoology   138
Faculty of Applied Science
Foreword  143
Regulations in Reference to Courses :..  144
General Outline of Courses 147
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering   149
Chemistry  ,.  131 The University of British Columbia
Page
Civil Engineering   152
Electrical Engineering _  154
Forest Engineering   155
Geological Engineering  157
Mechanical Engineering   159
Metallurgical Engineering   160
Mining Engineering   160
Cursing  and  Health  163
Double Courses for the Degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc  171
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc -  172
Examinations  and Advancement  178
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany  176
" " Chemistry  178
" " Civil Engineering  181
" " Economics   190
" " Forestry  190
" " Geology and Geography  195
" " Mathematics  199
™ " Mechanical and Electrical Engineering  200
" " Mining  and   Metallurgy  209
" Physics  212
" Nursing and Health  214
" " Zoology   217
Faculty of Agriculture
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
For the B.S.A. Degree  222
The Occupational Course... 223
Short Courses .  223
Extension Courses   223
Graduate Work 223, 225
Examinations  and  Advancement  227
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Agronomy  229
" "  Animal Husbandry  231
" "   Dairying 232
" "   Horticulture    233
" "   Poultry Husbandry  235
List of Students in Attendance, Session' 1934-35  241
Degrees Conferred, 1934 .  258
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1934  267
University Summer Session r.  271
Canadian Officers' Training Corps  274
Student Organization _  276
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates  279
Affiliated Colleges—
Victoria College  280
Union College of British Columbia 281
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia  281 Academic Year
August
15th Thursday
26tb Monday
31st Saturday
September
1st Sunday
2nd Monday
9th Monday to   1
16th Monday J
13th Friday to )
19th Thursday J
18th Wednesday
20th Friday
23rd Monday
24th Tuesday
25th Wednesday
October
1st Tuesday
7th Monday
9tb Wednesday
9th Wednesday
llth Friday
12th Saturday
16th Wednesday
23rd Wednesday
25th Friday
November
llth Monday
December
6th Friday
9th Monday to
19th Thursday
llth Wednesday
13th Friday
18tb Wednesday
25th Wednesday
ACADEMIC YEAR
1935
Last day for submission of applications for Supplemental Examinations.
Matriculation Supplemental Examinations begin.
Last day for submission of applications for admission to the First Year and to the Teacher
Training Course.
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day.   University closed August 31st to
September 2nd, inclusive.
Supplemental Examinations in Arts.
Supplemental Examinations in Applied Science.
Last day for Registration of First Year Students
in the Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture.    (See August 81, above.)
Last day for Registration of all other undergraduates except students in Extra-Sessional
Classes.
All students entering the University for the first
time report at 2 p.m. in the Auditorium.
The opening addresses to the students of all the
Faculties at 3 p.m. in the Auditorium.
Lectures begin at 9 a.m.
Last day for Registration of Graduate Students
and of Students in Extra-Sessional Classes.
Last day for payment of First Term fees. Payment of first instalment of Scholarship money.
Thanksgiving Day.   University closed.
Last day for payment of fees for Autumn Graduation.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Last day for change in Students' courses.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
Remembrance Day.   University closed.
Last day of Lectures for Term.
Examinations.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Christmas Day.   University closed December 25tb
and 26th. The University of British Columbia
January
1st Wednesday
6th Monday
20th Monday
February
12th Wednesday
14th Friday
19th Wednesday
28th Friday
April
9th Thursday
9th Thursday
10th Friday
llth Saturday to
25th Saturday
23rd Thursday
May
4th Monday
2nd Saturday
6th Wednesday
7th Thursday
7th Thursday
24th Sunday 1
June
3rd Wednesday
10th to 30th
July
1st  Wednesday
6th Monday
August
15th Saturday
22nd Saturday
28th Friday
28th Friday
31st Monday
1936
New Year's Day. University closed January 1st
and 2nd.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees. Payment of second instalment of Scholarship money.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
Last day of Lectures,  i
Last day for handing in graduation essays and
theses.
Good  Friday.   University closed.
Sessional Examinations'.
Field wort in Applied Science begins immediately
at the close of the examinations.
Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of Convocation.
Victoria   Day.    University   closed   Monday,   May
25th.
King's Birthday.    University closed.
Junior   and   Senior   Matriculation   Examinations.
(Time-tables to be arranged.)
Dominion Day.    University closed.
Summer Session begins.
Last clay for submission of applications for Supplemental Examinations.
Summer Session emds.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. J. W. Fordham Johnson, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, C.B.E., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S., F.R.C.S.
(Can.)
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., .D.Sc., LL.D.,Offieier de l'Instruction
Publique.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, C.B.E., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S., FJt.C.S.
(Can.)  (ex officio), (Chairman).
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction
Publique. (ex officio.)
The Hon. Mr. Justice Denis Murphy, B.A., Vancouver. Term
expires 1935.
Mrs. Maude M. Welsh, New Westminster.   Term expires 1935.
Frank P. Patterson, Esq., M.D., CM., F.R.C.S.E., F.A.C.S., Vancouver.    Term expires 1935.
Robie L. Reid, Esq., K.C, Vancouver.   Term expires 1937.
Christopher Spencer, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1937.
Francis James Burd, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1937.
His Honour Joseph N. Ellis, B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1939.k
B. C Nicholas, Esq., Victoria.   Term expires 1939.
W. H. Malkin, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1939.
SENATE
(a) The Chancellor, R. E. McKechnie, C.B.E., M.D., CM., LL.D.,
F.A.CS., F.R.C.S. (Can.)
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc,
LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
(b) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq.,
B.S.A., M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock,
.  Esq., M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.  (On leave of absence.)
Acting Dean, J. M. Turnbull, Esq., B.A.Sc.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan,
Esq., M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C
Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture: E. A. Lloyd,
Esq., M.S.A.; G. G. Moe, Esq., B.S.A., M.Sc, Ph.D.  Terms
expire 1936. The University of British Columbia
Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: F. A.
Wilkin, Esq., B.A.Sc.; H. F. G. Letson, Esq., M.C, B.Sc,
Ph.D.Engineering, A.M.I. Mech. E.    Terms expire 1936.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F.
Angus, Esq., M.A., B.CL.; Andrew H. Hutchinson, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.C.   Terms expire 1936.
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:—
H C. Holmes, Esq., B.A., Victoria.   Term expires 1936.
H. N. MacCorkindale, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.   Term expires 1936.
J. Newton Harvey, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1938.
(d) The principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson,
Esq., B.A.
The Principal of Victoria Normal School, V. L. Denton, Esq.,
B.A.
(e) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, G.
Roy Sanderson, Esq., M.A., Ph.D.   Term expires 1937.
(/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:—
Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esq., M.Sc. Term
expires 1936.
Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver, (Theological), Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A., D.D. Term expires 1936.
The  Anglican  Theological  College of  British   Columbia,
Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A., D.D.   Term expires 1936. ^1
(g) Elected by Convocation:—
H. T. Logan, Esq., M.A., Vancouver.
G. G. Sedgewick, Esq., B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B., LL.D., F.R.S.C, New
Westminster.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A., A.M., Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A., Vancouver.
A. E. Lord, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencier, M.A., D.D., Vancouver.
John C Oliver, Esq., B.A., B.A. Sc, Vancouver.
P. A. Boving, Esq., Cand. Ph., Cand. Agr., Vancouver.
His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A., Kamloops.
C Killam, Esq., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., Vancouver.
Mrs. Evlyn F. Farris, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver.
Sydney Anderson, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
Miss Isobel Harvey, M.A., Vancouver.
Terms expire 1936.
(h) Representative   of  the   British   Columbia   Teachers'   Federation:—      	 Officers and Staff
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A., D.Sc. (Iowa State College), LL.D. (Western Ontario), Officier de l'Instruction Publique, President.
Daniel Buchanan, M.A.   (McMaster), Ph.D.   (Chicago), LL.D.
(McMaster), F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Reginald W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), LL.D. (Hong Kong),
F.G.S., F.RS.C, Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science.  (On
leave of absence.
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc, Acting Dean.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of
Women.
Lemuel Robertson, M.A.   (McGill),   Director  of  the   Summer
Session.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar.
Miss E. B. Abernethy, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
Angus MacLucas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian.
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc,
LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A.,
M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq.,
M.A., L.L.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C. (On leave of absence).
Acting Dean, J. M. Turnbull, Esq., B.A.Sc
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Representative of the Faculty of Agriculture, P. A. Boving, Esq.,
Cand. Ph., Cand. Agr.
Representative of the Faculty of Applied Science,	
Representative of the Faculty of Arts and Science, L. F. Robertson, Esq., M.A.
Emeritus Professors
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Emeritus Professor of Mathematics.
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Emeritus Professor of Philosophy. 10 The University of British Columbia
Department of Agronomy
G. G. Moe, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor and
Head of the Department.
P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp,
Agriculture, Sweden), Professor.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S., Ph.D. (Wisconsin), Associate
Professor.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A.  (Toronto), M.S.  (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor and Head of the Department.
J. C Berry, B.S.A. (Brit. Col), Instructor.
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Hibbert Winslow Hill, Ivi.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D.
(Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the
Department.    (On leave of absence.)
C. E. Dolman, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Associate Professor of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine, and Acting Head of the
Department.
D. C. B. Duff, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor.
Department of Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago),
F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E., Associate Professor.
Miss E. M. R. Ashton, B.Sc. (London), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Edgar Black, B.A. (Brandon Col.), Assistant.
Bertram B. Hillary, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Jack M. Bickerton, B.S.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Charlotte Dill, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Wilfred Jack, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipzig), F.R.S.C,
Professor and Head of the Department.
E. H. Archibald, B.Sc. (Dal.), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.-
S.E.&C, Professor of Analytical Chemistry. Officers and Staff 11
W. F. Seyer, B.A., M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate
Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology), Associate Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (Cal. Inst, of Technology), Assistant Professor.
Norman Phillips, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Munro McArthur, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Robert A. Findlay, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
J. Gilbert Hooley, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
J. Norton Wilson, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Harry Lotzkar, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Civil Engineering
 Professor and Head of the Department.
F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill),. Associate Professor and Acting
Head of the Department.
 , Associate Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc.  (Brit. Col.)  M.S. in C.E.  (Illinois),
Assistant Professor. ^^
A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
Edward S. Pretious, B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Archie Peebles, B.A., B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Instructor.
Alexander Hrennikoff, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col), Instructor.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
0. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor.
H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Oxon), Professor.
Department of Dairying
 Professor and Head of the Department.
Blythe Eagles, B.A. (Brit. Col), Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department.
Miss Olga Okulitch, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Economics, Political Science, Commerce
and Sociology
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L., M.A. (Oxon.), Professor
and Head of the Department.
W. A. Carrothers, B.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (Edinburgh), D.F.C,
Professor.    (On leave of absence.) 12 The University of British Columbia
J. Friend Day, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor of Economics and Commerce.
C W. Topping, B.A. (Queen's), S.T.D. (Wesleyan Theol. College),
A.M., Ph.D. (Columbia), Associate Professor of Economics and
Sociology.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St. Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.), (London),
Associate Professor.
Frederick Field, C.A., Lecturer in Accountancy.
F. K. Collins, Lecturer in Commercial Law.
Reginald H. Tupper, Lecturer in Commercial Law.
W. H. Taylor, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Lecturer in Economics.
Miss Netta Harvey, B.Com. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
C N. Brennan, B.Com. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's).
Professor and Head of the Department.    (On leave of absence.)
Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), LL.D.
(McMaster), F.R.S.C, Acting Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
William G. Black, B.A. (Brit. CoL), M.A. (Chicago), Associate
Professor.
C B. Wood, A.M. (Columbia), Lecturer.
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and
Head of the Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D.
(Harvard), Professor.
Frederick G. C Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), F.R.S.C, Associate Professor.
Ira Dilworth, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant
Professor.
Hunter Campbell Lewis, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant Professor,
Miss Dorothy Blakey, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor.
Geoffrey Riddehough, B.A. (Brit. CoL), M.A. (California),
Assistant. Officers and Staff 13
Department of Forestry
 ; Professor and Head of the Department.
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Associate
Professor and Acting Head of the Department.
George S. Allen, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Honorary Lecturer in Forest
Products.
William Byers, Honorary Lecturer.
Edward W. Bassett, B.A.Sc (Brit. CoL), Honorary Lecturer.
Geo. H. Barnes, M.Sc.F., Honorary Lecturer.
A. E. Beaulieu, Honorary Lecturer.
Department of Geology and Geography
R. W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), LLJX (Hong Kong), F.G.S.,
F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. (On leave of
absence).
S. J. Schofield, M.A., B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of
Technology), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and
Strctural Geology and Acting Head of the Department.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A.,
F.R.S.C, Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy.
H. V. Warren, B.A., B.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), B.Sc, D.Phil. (Oxon.),
Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrography.
Roy Graham, M.A.Sc (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Assistant.
Gordon Davis, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Princeton), Assistant.
Department of History
W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Oxon.), Ph.D. (Toronto),
F.R. Hist. S., Professor and Head of the Department.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
A. C Cooke, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
Miss Sylvia Thrupp, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (London), Instructor.
Miss Margaret Ormsby, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor
and Head of the Department.
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
G. H. Harris, B.S.A. (Brit. CoL), M.S. (Oregon State College),
Ph.D. (California), Assistant Professor.
Frank E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Special Lecturer. 14 The University of British Columbia
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, M.A.   (McMaster),  Ph.D.   (Chicago), LL.D.
(McMaster), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago),
Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc (London), Associate Professor.
Walter H. Gage, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant Professor.
Frederick J. Brand, B.A. (Brit. CoL), B.Sc. (Oxon.), Assistant
Professor.
Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Instructor.
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham),
F.A.I.E.E., Professor and Head of the Department.
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D.Engineering
(London), A.M.I. Mech. E., Associate Professor of Mechanical
and Electrical Engineering.   (On leave of absence.)
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc. Eng. (London), Wh.Sch., A.M.I.Mech.E.,
A.F.R.A.S., Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
E. Geoffrey Cullwick, M.A. (Cantab.), A.M.I.E.E., Mem.A.I.
E.E., Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering.
W. B. Coulthard, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E., R.N., M.E.I.C, Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
R. Rolleston West, D.S.O., B.A. (Cantab.), A.M.I.CE. (England), Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering.
Walter J. Lind, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining.
 - ..Assistant Professor of Metallurgy.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
 Professor and Head of the Department.
David Owen Evans, M.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.), D.Lett. (Univ. of
Paris), Professor of French, and Acting Head of the Department.
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of
French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Associate Professor of German. Officers and Staff 15
Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Officier
d'Academie (France), Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Munich), Instructor in German.
Miss Wessie Tipping, M.A. (Brit. Col), Docteur de l'Universite
de Paris, Instructor in French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Docteur de l'Universite
de Paris, Instructor in French.
Madame G. Barry, Instructor.
Madame D. Darlington, Instructor.
Department of Nursing and Health
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D.
(Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.    (On leave of absence.)
C E. Dolman, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Acting Head of the Department.
Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. CSimmons College), Assistant Professor of Nursing.
Miss Margaret E. Kerr, R.N., B.A.Sc. Nursing (Brit. CoL), M.A.
(Columbia), Instructor.
G. F. Amyot, M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Lecturer in Preventable Diseases and Epidemiology. •
J. W. McIntosh, B.A., M.B., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Lecturer in Public Health.
Department of Philosophy
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor
and Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
 Associate Professor.
Department of Physics
T. C. Hebb, M.A., B.Sc (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and
Head of the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, 111.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor. 16 The University of British Columbia
George Volkoff, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Robert Christy, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
George Mossop, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Kenneth R. McKenzie, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Henry H. Clayton, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
Jacob Biely, M.S.A.  (Brit. CoL), M.S.  (Kansas State College),
Instructor.
Department of Zoology
C. McLean Fraser, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Associate Pro-
lessor
Miss Gertrude M. Smith, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Calif.),
Assistant Professor.
G. Morley Neal, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
George P. Holland, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
University Health Service
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H.  (Toronto), LL.D.
(Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Acting Head of the University
Health Service.
Harold White, M.D., CM.  (McGill), M.D., CM.   (ad eundem
Sask.), D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.O Gr. Brit., L.M.C.C, Medical
Examiner to Students.
Mrs. C A. Lucas, R.N., Public Health Supervisor. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was first
advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not until
1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act establishing
a body politic and corporate named "The University of British
Columbia.' In 1891 this Act was amended to require that a
meeting of the Senate be held within one month after the election
of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were elected, but
a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by the Chancellor,
Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish
a University in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University was
begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted the
affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized Canadian
Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was affiliated with
McGill University in order to provide First Year work in Arts,
and took the name of Vancouver College. First Year work in Arts
was offered by Victoria High School when it became Victoria
College by affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same
year Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal Institution
for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in
the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University
College of British Columbia. The scope of the work undertaken
by this college was gradually increased until at the time it was
taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving
three years in Arts and Science, and two years in Applied Science.
When the University of British Columbia opened in the autumn
of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and
Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it, ceased
to exist.
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by Dr.
H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he introduced
a "University Endowment Act." This Act was followed in 1908
by an Act establishing and incorporating the University of British
Columbia and repealing the old Act of 1890-1. This Act, with its
subsequent amendments, determines the present constitution of the
University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature
in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site
Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University. The
Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in Victoria,
and after a thorough examination of the Province recommended 18 The University of British Columbia
the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council
decided to place the University at Point Grey—the site which the
Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the Legislature
passed an Act authorizing the Lieutenant-Governor in Council to
grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915,
so that it now consists of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey.
The waters of the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of
Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between
it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government
in order that University revenue may be provided by its sale or
lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in
detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block
plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus. Messrs.
Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the successful
competitors, and were appointed University Architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 21st, 1912, chose Mr.
F. L. Carter-Cotton as first Chancellor of the University. In March,
1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as President
of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A., M.D., CM., LL.D. On
April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected Chancellor.
Dr. McKechnie has been re-elected continuously since that date
and entered on his sixth term in May, 1933. On the death of President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and on
June 1st, 1919, President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part of
the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building at
the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted
because of war conditions. Work on this building was resumed in
1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the contract was let for
the Library. These two buildings, which are of stone and are
fireproof, conform closely to the original plans as prepared by
the architects in 1914. The initial units of these structures, as well
as nine other buildings which are of a less permanent character,
were completed in 1925, and at the beginning of Session 1925-26
the University commenced work in its new quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on October
15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees were
granted by the University for the first time. Historical Sketch 19
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the British
Columbia University Act, B.C.R.S. 1924, c. 265, and Amending
Acts, which provide
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation,
Board of Governors, Senate, the Faculty Council, and the
Faculties; that the first Convocation shall consist of all
graduates of any university in His Majesty's dominions
resident in the Province two years prior to the date fixed
for the first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-
five members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in
Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of the
Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convocation, and
all graduates of the University; that the Chancellor shall
be elected by Convocation; that the Board of Governors
shall consist of the Chancellor, President, and nine
persons — three elected by the Senate and six appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council; that the
Senate shall consist of: (a) The Chancellor, and the President of the University, who shall be chairman thereof; (6)
the deans and two professors of each of the Faculties elected
by members of the Faculty; (c) three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council; (d) the
principals of the normal schools; (e) one member elected
by the high-school principals and assistants who are actually
engaged in teaching; (/) one member to be elected by the
governing body of every affiliated college or school in
this Province; (g) fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from the members thereof; (h) one member elected
by the British Columbia Teachers' Federation.
It is further provided that the University shall be non-sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to grant
such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of
knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine. It
reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to confer
degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts that'' No other
university having corporate powers capable of being exercised
within the Province shall be known by the same name, nor shall
any such university have power to grant degrees." LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
Location
The University is situated on the promontory which forms the
western extremity of the Point Grey. Peninsula. On three sides
it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises an area of
548 acres, of which approximately one-half is campus. In all
directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly rugged and
impressive.
Buildings
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen
hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semi-permanent. The former were designed by the University architects,
Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the
Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The
permanent buildings have been erected in the location originally
assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated as
"unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned"
area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended
for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of present
requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution.
This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the
present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the
whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present
advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation with
a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is
used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate
system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences,
and a specially constructed system for fume closets. The various
services throughout these buildings, such as hot and cold water,
distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed
air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are all of a modern type.
An attempt has been made to reduce vibration and noise to a
minimum by installing all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with
a further insulation of cork.
Library
The University Library consists of 95,000 volumes and about
10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in all the
courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works
on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 686 magazines and
periodical publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional
system. Location and Buildings 21
Books to which the teaching staff have specially referred their
students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These are shelved apart
from the main collection, and are loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period.
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals, and
books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation,
are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students of
the University, its resources are available to those of the general
public engaged in research or special study, and who make personal
application to the Librarian for the privilege of its use. Such
persons are known as "Extra-mural Readers." By order of the
Board of Governors, a fee of $1.00 per calendar year is charged
such readers. In addition, they pay necessary mailing costs, a
deposit being required from those unable to call personally for
books loaned.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made gifts
to the Library during the past year. These have been both valuable
and numerous. Their number prevents detailed acknowledgment,
but recognition should be made of a number of sets of transactions,
and complete or partial sets of scientific periodicals, given by
societies and friends of the University. The most interesting and
valuable of these gifts are listed in the annual report of the
Library to the Senate. Special mention should be made of the gift
to the Library of $15,000.00 by the Carnegie Corporation of New
York, for the purchase of books for Undergraduate Reading. This
payment was made in three annual instalments of $5,000.00 each,
the last having been received in December, 1934.
Gymnasium
This building was completed in 1929 and presented to the
University by the Alma Mater Society. It is situated adjacent to
the tennis courts and conveniently close to the playing fields. The
style of architecture and exterior finish harmonizes well with that
of the other buildings on the campus. The playing floor has an
area of 6,000 square feet, and is surrounded on three sides by tiers
of benches which will accommodate 1,400 persons. In the space
behind these seats are located the dressing rooms, drying rooms,
locker rooms and shower baths. Approximately one-third of this
space has been set aside for the exclusive use of the women
students. In addition there are four large rooms. Three of these
have been assigned to undergraduate clubs; the fourth is a well-
equipped kitchen. Equipment suitable for general gymnasium and
indoor athletic work has been provided. 22 The University of British Columbia
Playing Field
In accordance with the original landscape plan prepared by
Mawson in 1913, the playing fields area, consisting of about 16
acres, is situated east of the East Mall and north of the University
Boulevard. Development work was started early in January, 1931,
as an aid to the acute unemployment situation, and was made
possible by funds provided chiefly by subscriptions from the
Faculty, students, and friends of the University. Much of the
labour was obtained through the courtesy of the Relief Department
of the City of Vancouver. Twenty thousand cubic yards of soil
and grave] were used to bring the track and field to grade. The
total cost to date has been approximately $20,000.
The grass field is full-sized and is surrounded by a quarter-mile
cinder track. The area is enclosed by an eight-foot board fence.
It is hoped that in the near future some provision may be made
for either temporary or permanent seating accommodation.
Forest Products Laboratories
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, Vancouver
Laboratory, which is maintained by the Forest Service of the
Department of the Interior, Canada, occupies three buildings
provided and kept up through a co-operative agreement between
the University and the Dominion Government.
Plan of Campus
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings
which have been erected and indicates the nature of their construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups of
buildings which are to be erected in the future.
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
During the session 1934-35 the University received from the
Carnegie Corporation of New York a grant of $50,000.00. This
sum will be used for the following purposes: (a) To increase the
usefulness of the University to the people of the Province by an
organized extension of external University activities, including
particularly the organization and supervision of adult education
under University auspices; (b) to pay a portion of the travelling
expenses of members of the staff who wish to attend meetings of
learned societies to present papers prepared by them; (c) to provide scholarships to enable graduate students of marked ability
to continue their studies in the University of British Columbia
or in another approved University. These expenditures will be
extended over a period of three or four years. Endowments and Donations
23
A gift of money sufficient for the perpetual endowment of a
Gold Medal and Scholarship in Chemistry was made during the
session 1934-35 by Mrs. Lily Alice Lefevre. The medal and scholarship are to be awarded annually and are given in memory of the
donor's late husband, Dr. J. M. Lefevre.
Dr. Francis John Nicholson has donated to the University a
fund sufficient to provide annually two scholarships, each of
$500.00, for the encouragement of graduate study in Chemistry and
Geology.
Mrs. M. L. Buttimer has given to the University, in memory
of her late husband, Mr. Alfred J. Buttimer, a very valuable
collection of Indian handicraft, including 138 specimens of baskets,
hats, drums, needlework, etc, mostly from British Columbia.
It has become a tradition for each Graduating Class to make a
gift to the University. That of the Class of 1934 took the form
of an Electric Clock for the Auditorium and $75.00 for the Library
Fund.
A list of the other most important gifts received during last
year is given below under the various departments.
Department of Animal Husbandry
Dr. W. Hawke, Cloverdale—Proceedings of Amer. Vet. Med. Assn, (1912),
Proceedings of Amer. Vet. Med. Assn (1913); "Veterinary Pathology," by
Friedberger & Frohner; Vol. I, "Infective Diseases of Animals," Vol. II,
"Non-infective Diseases of Animals," "Veterinary Anatomy," by Strange-
way.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
H. J. Hopkin, Merville.
B. O. Iverson, Wardner.
M. Owens, Evelyn.
Department of Botany, University of Toronto.
C. M. "Webster, Armstrong.
Botanical Gardens, University of Michigan
Brooklyn Botanical Garden.
Marsh Botanical Garden, Yale University.
New York Botanical Garden.
United  States Department of Agriculture.
Royal Botanic Garden, Kew, England.
Royal Botanic Garden, Edinburgh,  Scotland.
Royal Horticultural  Gardens, Surrey, England.
James MacGregor, Esq., Glasgow, Scotland.
Botanical  Garden,  Gothenburg.
Botanical Garden, Lund.
Botanical Garden, Universitas    Regia    Fredericiana,
Oslo.
Jardin Botanique de Copenhague.
Arboretum Landbouwhoogeschool, Wageningen.
Botanical   Garden,  Amsterdam.
Arboretum des Barres et Fruticetum Vilmorinianum,
Loiret.
Jardin Botanique, Ville de Nantes.
Jardin Botanique pare de la Tete-d'or, Lyon.
Museum d'Historie Naturelle, Paris.
CANADA
UNITED STATES
GREAT BRITAIN
SWEDEN
NORWAY
HOLLAND
FRANCE 24 The University of British Columbia
JAPAN Botanical Garden, Imperial University, Tokyo.
Botanical Garden, The Sun-Yat-Sen Tomb and Memorial Park Commission, Nanking.
Botanical    Garden,   Hakkaido   Imperial   University,
Sapporo.
SPAIN Jardin Botanico de Madrid.
PORTUGAL Jardin Botanico da Universidade de Coimbra.
SWITZERLAND Botanical Garden, Basel.
CZECHOSLOVAKIA Botanicka Zahrada,  University Karlovy.
GERMANY Botanischen Gartens, Dresden.
Botanischen Gartens, Berlin-Dahlem.
ROME Department of Botany, University of Rome.
AUSTRIA Dr. F. Lampert, Hatzendorf, Steirmark.
Botanischer Garten der Universitat, Graz.
ROUMANIA Botanical Garden, University of Bucarest.
POLAND The Kornik Gardens and Arboretum, Kornik.
RUSSIA Botanical Garden, Kaunas, Lithuania.
Jardin Botanique de 1'Academic Agronomique, Gorky.
HERBARIUM  AND  GARDEN  SPECIMENS
Miss Jean Bostock, Monte Creek, B. C
Mr. Jas. L. Hall, Coppermine District—Collection of Arctic flora.
Miss N. Stark, Victoria, B. C
Miss M. C.  Stonor, Summerland, B. C.
Mr. A. C. Thrupp, Vancouver, B. C
Mr. Chas. M. Webster, Armstrong, B. C
Dr. M. Y. Williams, Vancouver, B. G W. "^
Mr. A. York, Alice Arm, B. C—Polystichum Braunii.
Mr. E. Lamarque, Vancouver, B. C—Plants from Bedeau Expedition.
Department of Forestry
British Columbia Forest Service, Victoria—Copies of Working Plans of B. C.
Forests; four hundred fir and spruce trees from Green Timbers Nursery
for planting in University forest; pamphlets.
Dominion Forest Service,  Vancouver—Tree seeds,  Are torch.
Timberman   Publishing   Co.,   Portland—Subscription   to   "The   Timberman."
Mr. J. Warren Bell,  Vancouver—Sample of kauri gum.
Geology Department, U.B.C—Section of Douglas fir log.
B. C. Lumber and Shingle Manufacturers' Association, Vancouver—Copy of
text-book,  "Applied  Lumber  Science."
The Department is particularly Indebted to the Department of National
Defense for free labor and supplies from Unemployment Relief Camp No.
290, which are being used in improvement and reforestation work in the
University forest.
Department of Geology and Geography
B. C Chamber of Mines—Suites of ores.
Bralorne Gold Mines Ltd.—Suite of ores.
Bridge Island Gold Mines Ltd.—Suite of ores.
Cariboo Gold Quartz Ltd.—Suite of ores.
J. M. Cummings, Vancouver—Suite of ores, Athelstan-Jackson Mine; suite
of tetrahedrite ores; trilobite pygidium from Fort Steele Road near
Cranbrook, B.C.; inoceramus from Crowsnest River, two miles east of
Crowsnest  Lake.
R. A. Cummings, Vancouver—Aucella and argillite from boulders on Sixty-
fifth Avenue, Vancouver.
Dentonia Mines Ltd.—Suite of ores.
W. J. Dickinson—Three samples of moulding sand used in Vancouver.
Dr. Victor Dolmage—Suite of tetrahedrite ores.
P.  B. Esswein,  South Pine River, B. C.;—Black bear skull and beaver skull.
J. F. Feeney, Vancouver—Suite of ores.
G. G. Fleming—Numerous concretions from Hurley Creek, B. C. Limestone
containing Halysites, and other rock specimens.
Island Gold Mines, Ltd.—Suite of ores.
Clifford S. Lord—Suite of tetrahedrite ores.
C. Meldrum—Suite of ores. Endowments and Donations 25
Minto Mine—Suite of ores.
Major Harold Molson, Vancouver—Four antelope skulls and horns, a Hon
skull and wart hog tusks; on permanent loan.
Olympic Gold Mines Ltd.—Suite of ores.
W. H. Patmore—Mesozoic fossils from northern B. C.
Pioneer Gold Mines Ltd.—Suite of ores.
Reno Gold Mines—Suite of ores.
A. E. Sprange—Various ores.
R. H. Stewart, Vancouver—Specimens of argentite.
Timmins Corp. Ltd.—Suite of ores.
Dr. H. V. Warren, Vancouver—Ammonites from Chilcotin.
R. Wolfenden, Victoria, B. C.—Productus from Mendip Hills, Somerset, England.
Wayside Mines—Suite of ores.
V.  A.  Zanadvoroff,  Vancouver—Hamites  fossils  from  near Courtenay,  B. C.
Department of Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering
Canadian General Electric Co., Vancouver—Power-factor demonstration
apparatus, comprising small induction motor, condenser, switchboard,
and several meters and switches.
Northern Electric Co.—Batch of radio tubes.  A
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
Holman Bros., Camborne, England, through kindness of B. C. Equipment
Co., as a continued loan, to be replaced annually with the latest models:
One Drifter type rock drill, 1 Stoper type of rock drill, 1 Jackhamer
type of rock drill; extra parts and fittings.
Department of Physics
Bell  Telephone  Laboratories,  New York:    Set  of  eight  phonograph  records
Illustrating acoustic phenomena.
Department of Zoology
Canadian Industries Ltd., New Westminster (per Mr. R. Asher)—Samples of
insecticides.   I
Chance & Hunt, Ltd., London, England (per Mr. H. E. J. Cory)—An extensive
series of samples of Insecticides.
Dominion  Entomological  Branch,  Division  of  Forest  Insects '(per  Messrs.
R. Hopping and W.  Mathers)—Series of  25  species of Canadian bark
beetles.
Mr. Wm. Gibson, McGill University—Series of 100 microscope slides of brain.
Mr. K. Graham, Langley Prairie—One large case of native diptera.
Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire, Vancouver—A unique case of Indian
Lepidoptera.
Mr. J. S. Keyes, Kamloops—Graded series of seven antlered heads of mule
deer;  three black bear skulls;  one cougar  skull;  one  skull  of domestic
goat.   All  from  the Kamloops region.
Mr. Wm. McKenzie, late Range Commissioner for B. C.—Prepared skulls of
muskrat and skunk.
Mr. T. K Moilliett, Kamloops—Thirteen specimens of Little Brown Bat from
Merritt, B. C.; black bear skull from Vavenby, B. C.
Mr. Wm. Riley, River Road, New Westminster—An extensive series of skins
and skeletons of local shrew-mole; prepared skull of Norway rat;  Big-
eared Bat.   All from Agassiz, B. C.
Misses F. E. and M. D.  Spencer—Gratuitous labelling and arranging of  14
cases of insects.
Messrs. E. R. Buckell, Vernon; E. A. Cameron, Kamloops; R. A. Cumming,
Burnaby;  T. K.  Moilliett,  Vavenby;  J. W.  Munro,  Nanaimo;  K.  Racey,
Vancouver, and M. Y. Williams, Vancouver—Collections of ecto-paraslte
of birds and mammals.
The Department is especially indebted to the following specialists who
have gratuitously named extensive series of B. C. insects for us:
Dr.   F.   C.   Bishopp,   Bureau   of   Entomology,   Washington,   D. C.    (parasitic
Muscldae).
Mr.  Wm.   Downes,   Dominion  Entomological   Branch,  Victoria   (IS  cases  of
Hemiptera-Homoptera). 26 The University of British Columbia
Dr. David Hall,  Savannah,  Georgia  (Sarcophagidae).
Mr. R. Hopping, Vernon, B.C.  (Coleoptera).
Mr. W.   Mathers,   Vernon,   B. C.   (Scolytidae).
Dr. J. Wagner, Belgrade, Jugo-Slavia  (Aphaniptera).
Mr. Stuart Walley, Dominion Entomological Branch, Ottawa (Hymenoptera).
H.  W.  J.  Doffegnies,  Kisaran,  Asahan.  Sumatra—A  python  skin.
GIFTS   OF   POSTAGE   STAMPS   FOR   THE   UNIVERSITY   COLLECTION
Mr. J. N. Harvey—-General collection of postage stamps, made by his son,
the late Gerald Myles Harvey, and covering different countries of the
world.
Mr. Lewis Stockett—Postage Due stamps of Canada.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the First of September and ends
on the last day of August. The Winter Session is divided into two
terms—the first, September to December; the second, January to
May. The Summer Session consists of seven weeks' instruction in
July and August, for which preparatory reading is required except
in certain cases. For "Admission to the University," see Page 29,
and for "Registration and Attendance" see Page 31.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1935-36 the University offers instruction in
each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science, Applied Science
(including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees of
Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Applied
Science and Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. In addition a
course is given in the Faculty of Arts and Science leading to a
Diploma of Social Service, and a Teacher Training Course is
offered for graduates of the Faculties of Arts and Science and
Applied Science. It is also possible to proceed to a Master's degree
in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and facilities
for research are offered to students who are graduates of any
University or College of recognized standing. Admission to these
advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does not in itself
imply admission to candidacy for a higher degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves
and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the
same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge
pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular General Information 27
Faculty, the Bachelor of Commerce hood being differentiated by
the addition of a white cord; the Master's hood is the same, lined
with the distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science,
the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture,
maize.
University Health Service
The University Campus is situated within the University
Endowment Lands, which, as unorganized territory, comes under
the direct control of the Provincial Government. Shortly after the
opening of the present University Buildings in 1925, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council, by the recommendation of the Provincial Health Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer for the
Reserve, including the University Campus. This Health Officer has
on the Campus and in the Reserve all the powers of any Health
Officer anywhere. ^ i
In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added to the
University Health Service a Public Health Nurse, whose presence
permits the continuous operation of a local Health Department on
the Campus and Reserve.
In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the
University for the general supervision of the individual health of
the students, first aid, etc. An office for the Public Health Nurse
is provided in the Auditorium Building, and, by the gift of the
Graduating Class of 1927, has been equipped with first aid
furniture and supplies.
Physical Examination. — In order to promote the physical
welfare of the student body, students on entering the University
are required to report immediately to the University Health
Service and obtain an appointment for their physical examination;
the examination is conducted by, or under the direction of, the
University Medical Examiner. Physical defects and weaknesses,
amenable to treatment, may thus be discovered, and the student is
advised to apply to his physician for such remedial measures as
his case may require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are
re-examined in their second and subsequent years.
Rules Governing Medical Examinations.— (1) Students must
present themselves for medical examination on the date and at
the time assigned by the University Health Service. (2) Students
failing to report on the right date or reporting on a wrong date
lose their assignment. (3) Students who do not conform to the
above regulations' will be referred to the University Health Committee.
Infectious Diseases.—Students developing any illness or suffering from any injury while on the Campus should apply for first 28 The University of British Columbia
aid to the Public Health Nurse. This is particularly required if the
student develops any illness of an infectious nature, including
the Common Cold. Provision is made also for the diagnosis of the
infectious cases and their safe removal to suitable quarters.
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury while
at home, boarding house, fraternity house, etc., are required to
report the same to the Public Health Nurse. The development
of any infectious disease in a University student must be reported
by the student to the University Health Service without delay.
Students exposed to any infectious disease must immediately
report to the University Health Service. Such students may be
permitted, by special order of the Medical Health Officer, to attend
the University for a prescribed period, despite the exposure.
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the discretion
of the Medical Health Officer) to the Public Health Nurse for such
prescribed period. Failure to so report will result in immediate
exclusion from the University.
Students absent on account of illness must present Medical
Certificates. If the absence occurs during the session, the student
must appear in person, with the certificate, at the University
Health Service immediately on return to the University, and before
attendance upon class work. The University Health Service will
examine the person concerned and will immediately forward the
certificate, with report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty. If
the absence occurs during the examinations, the medical certificate
must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within two days after the
termination of the examination period. A medical certificate must
show the nature and the period of the disability. Medical report
forms may be obtained from the Dean's office.
University Employment Bureau
The objects of the Employment Bureau are to provide students
with summer employment, to provide part-time work for students
during the "Winter Session, and to help students in obtaining
positions after graduation. This service is for employers seeking
help and for students desiring employment. Those who know of
positions vacant are requested to notify the Bureau. Correspondence should be addressed to the Employment Bureau, Registrar's
Office.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by
parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions,
vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the
social'and intellectual life of the women students. Admission to the University 29
Board and Residence
A list of boarding-houses, which receive men or women students,
but not both, may be obtained from the Registrar after September
1st. Men and women students are not permitted to lodge in the
same house, unless they are members of the same family, or receive
special permission from the Senate. Women students under
twenty-five years of age are permitted to occupy suites in apartment houses only when accompanied by some older person. Any
such arrangement must be made in consultation with the Dean of
Women. The Dean of Women also undertakes the inspection and
approval of the boarding houses listed for women. The cost of
good board and lodging is from $25 per month upwards; of a
room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill is operated under the
supervision of the University, and lunch, afternoon tea and light
supper may. be obtained there at very reasonable prices. Refreshments at social functions are also supplied.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities which
naturally rest with parents. This being so, it is the policy of the
University to rely on the good sense and on the home training of
students for the preservation of good moral standards.
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University should be
addressed to the Registrar.
The accommodation for students in the University is limited.
The University, therefore, reserves the right to limit the attendance.
For the session 1935-36 the number of First Year students in
the Faculty of Arts and Science and the Faculty of Agriculture
will be limited to 500, in the Second Year of the course in Applied
Science to 120, in the First Year of the course in Nursing to 15,
and in the Teacher Training course to 60.
1. Except under special circumstances, no student under the
age of sixteen is admitted to the University. For admission to the
course in Nursing a student must be seventeen years of age, and
for admission to any course in Social Service, twenty-one years of
age.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First Year
of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of Agriculture
and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to 30 The University of British Columbia
pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the Province of
British Columbia or to submit certificates showing that they have
passed an equivalent examination elsewhere. Students over 18
years of age with full "Normal Entrance" standing, who hold
Normal School certificates, are admitted to the University as having
full Junior Matriculation standing. Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in Applied Science, and are given
under the heading of '' Admission'' in the Applied Science Section
of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year in the
Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial Senior
Matriculation standing, obtained in 1927 or subsequently, will be
granted credit in the First Year in each subject in which they have
made 50 per cent, or over, or in each paper in which they have
made 50 per cent, or over, in so far as these papers correspond with
those of the First Year.
4. A student who has a failure in a subject of the Junior
Matriculation examination standing against him will not be
admitted to the University.
5. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of the
Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High School
and University Matriculation Board of the Province. This Board
consists of members appointed by the Department of Education
and by the University. The requirements for Matriculation are
stated in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation,"
issued by the University. The courses of study for the various
grades in the high school are given in the "Programme of Studies
for the High and Technical Schools," issued by the Department
of Education.
6. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has passed
the Matriculation Examination of another University will be
accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has
covered the same subjects and required the same standard. If,
however, the examination covers some but not all of the necessary
subjects, the candidate will be required to pass the Matriculation
Examination in the subjects not covered.
7. A candidate who wishes, to enter by certificates other than a
Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia should submit
to the Registrar the original certificates. If he wishes these returned
to him, he must present also a copy of each certificate for record at
the University. He should under no circumstances come, to the
University without having first obtained from the Registrar a Registration and Attendance 31
statement of the value of the certificates he holds, as these may
lack one or more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject
may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained may not be
sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate
may admit to one Faculty and not to another. When an applicant's
diploma or certificate does not show the marks obtained in the
several subjects of the examination, he must arrange to have a
statement of his marks sent to the Registrar by the Education
Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate. The
fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany the application.
8. A student of another University applying for exemption
from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is
required to submit with his application a Calendar of the University in which he has previously studied, together with a complete
statement of the course he has followed and a certificate of the
standing gained in the several subjects.* The Faculty concerned
will determine the standing of such a student in this University.
The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must
accompany the application.
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University are
required to make application to the Registrar, on forms to be
obtained from the Registrar's Office. This application should be
made in person or by mail early in August, or as soon as the results
of the Matriculation examinations are known, and must be accompanied by the Registration and Library Fee of $5.00 (See regulations in reference to "Admission to the University," Page 29.)
The last days for registration are: For First Year students im
the Faculties of Arts and Science and Agriculture, and in the Course
in Nursing, and for other students coming to the University for the
first time, Wednesday, September 18th; for other ^undergraduate
students of the regtdar winter session, Friday, September 20th; for
graduate students, Tuesday, October 1st; for students in "extra-
sessional" classes, Tuesday, October 1st.
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses of
study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree, whether
they are proceeding to a Master's degree or not. Students,
however, who are proceeding to a Bachelor's degree in
another course in the same Faculty in which they hold a
•For the conditions under which exemption is granted in the Faculty of
Arts and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A." The University of British Columbia
degree,  or in  another  Faculty,  will  register as undergraduates.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree in
any Faculty who have passed all the examinations precedent to the year in which they are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to a
degree with defects in their standing which do not prevent
their entering a higher year under the regulations governing "Examinations and Advancement" of the Faculty in
which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the
three preceding classes.   (See 7, Page 33.)
2. All students other than graduate students are required to
register at the office of the Registrar on or before the last day for
registration, to furnish the information necessary for the University records, to enroll for the particular classes which they wish
to attend, and to sign the following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Columbia,
and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered, and to
any amendments thereto which may be made while I am a student
of the University, and I promise to observe the same."
In the information furnished for the University records,
students are requested to state what churches they propose to
make their place of worship. This information is available for any
of the city churches desiring it.
3. A late registration fee of $2.00 will be charged all students
who register after the above dates.
No registration after Wednesday, October 9th (two weeks beyond
the date when lectures begin) will be accepted without the special
permission of the Faculty concerned, and a candidate so accepted
for registration may be required to take fewer courses than the
regular year's work.
4. Students registering for the first time must present the
certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to
the course of study for which they wish to register. The Registrar
is empowered to register all duly qualified students. Doubtful cases
will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will register in
the lower year and fill out their course cards in such a way as to
make clear which courses are required to complete the lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for which
they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the proper Registration and Attendance
form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance,
no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of the session.
If the application is approved by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree, are
not normally required to pass an examination for admission, but
before registering they must produce a certificate showing that
they have satisfied the Dean and the Heads of the Departments
concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the
course of study which they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths of
the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence
on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory and credit
for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence consequent on
illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by the Dean of
the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates or other evidence
must be presented. If the absence occurs during the session, the
student must appear in person, with the certificate, at the University Health Service immediately on return to the University,
and before attendance upon class work. The University Health
Service will examine the person concerned and will immediately
forward the certificate, with report thereon, to the Dean of the
Faculty. If the absence occurs during the examinations, the certificate must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within two days
after the termination of the examination period. A medical certificate must show the nature and the period of the disability.
Medical report forms may be obtained from the Dean's office. In
cases of deficient attendance students may (with the sanction of
the Dean and the Head of the Department concerned) be excluded
from the Christmas or the final examinations in a course; but, in
the case of a final examination, unless the unexcused absences
exceed one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such
student may be permitted to sit for supplemental examination.
(See regulation in each Faculty in reference to "Examinations and
Advancement.")
9. All candidates for a degree must make formal application
for graduation at least one month previous to the Congregation at
which they expect to obtain the degree. Special forms for this
purpose may be obtained from the Registrar's office. 34 The University of British Columbia
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The University of British Columbia."
The Registration Fee is not returnable.
The Sessional Fees are as follows:—
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
in arts and science—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money    5.00
      80.00
Second Term.—Payable on or before January 20th      60.00
$145.00
IN SOCIAL SERVICE COURSE—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th       60.00
$145.00
NOTE:—Social  Service Workers taking any of Courses  1-13, and these
courses only, are relieved from  paying the Alma Mater fee.
IN TEACHER TRAINING COURSE—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th       60.00
$145.00 Fees 35
IN APPLIED SCIENCE—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee $90.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
    105.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th      85.00
$195.00
IN NURSING AND PUBLIC HEALTH—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th :
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money     5.00
      80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th      60.00
$145.00
NOTE:—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional
fee is $1.00, payable with an Alma Mater fee of $5.00, on or before October
7th.
Students admitted to a One-year Course for Graduate Nurses and proceeding to the Certificate on a basis of part-time attendance over two or more
years, will pay the regular fee for the whole course, but the amount payable
each year will be at the rate of $7.50 per unit.
IN AGRICULTURE	
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  .— $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee $65.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money    5.00
 80.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th..      60.00
$145.00 36 The University of British Columbia
occupational course—
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $     5.00
First Term—Payable on or before October 7th:
Sessional Fee  $25.00
Alma Mater Fee  10.00
Caution Money    5.00
      40.00
Second Term—Payable on or before January 20th      25.00
$ 70.00
For Partial Students
Fees per "Unit" $10.00
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration      5.00
First half payable on or before October 7th, along
with—
Alma Mater Fee :.... 10.00
Caution Money     5.00
Second half payable on or before January 20th.
For Students in Extra Sessional Classes
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration   $ 5.00
Fees per 3-Unit Course  30.00
First Half Unit Fees payable on or before October 7th.
Second Half Unit Fees payable on or before January 20th.
For Graduates
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration    $     5.00
Class Fees—Payable on or before October 7th:
First Registration  $75.00
Caution Money      5.00
      80.00
$ 85.00
Each subsequent Session Registration $ 5.00
Caution Money     5.00
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before
registration       5.00
 $   15.00 Fees 37
Late Registration
See page 32 $     2.00
After the dates given above and up to and including October
24th and February 6th an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted
of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students for the
support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the
Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will be
made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials in
laboratories, Library, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student
falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required.
Caution Money will be refunded after the 30th day of April. Any
caution money unclaimed by the llth day of May will be turned
over to the Alma Mater Society.
Immediately after the last day for the payment of fees, students
whose fees have not been paid will have their registrations cancelled, and will be excluded from classes. Such students will not
be permitted to register again during the term until they obtain
the consent of the Dean, pay all fees, and present to the Registrar
a statement from the Bursar certifying that fees have been paid.
Students registering after October 7th shall pay their fees at
the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the
provisions of the preceding Regulation.
Students borrowing books from the University Library for
Preparatory Reading courses will be required to make the usual
deposit of two dollars ($2.00) with the Librarian to cover mailing
cost.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional fee
of $2.00 will be exacted.
Registration and Library Fee—Payable before registration  $ 5.00
Minimum Class Fee  25.00
Per "Unit"    10.00
Summer Session Association     2.00
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination,
per paper   $ 5.00
Special examination  (Applied Science and Agriculture), per paper    7.50
Re-reading, per paper    2.00
Graduation    15.00 38 The University of British Columbia
Supplemental examination fees must be paid by August 15th
when application for examination is made. Special examination
fees and fees for re-reading are payable with application.
Graduation fees must be paid two weeks before Congregation.
(See regulation in reference to application for a degree, page 33.)
If fees are not paid when due an additional fee of $2.00 will be
charged. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 39
MEDALS,   SCHOLARSHIPS,   PRIZES,  BURSARIES
AND LOANS FOR 1935-36
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. Scholarships, prizes and bursaries which are not based solely
on academic standing are indicated by an asterisk. Unless other
instructions are given in the Calendar notice, intending candidates
must make application to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations on forms provided for the purpose.
2. All awards of medals, scholarships, prizes and bursaries are
made by Senate, unless otherwise provided for by special resolution
of Senate.
The award of a medal, prize, scholarship or bursary is final when
announced by the University. (   a
3. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open to
winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and marks
obtained in summer session courses are not taken into account in
awarding them.
4. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based on an
examination, no award will be made to a candidate who obtains
less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
5. To be eligible for a General Proficiency Scholarship a student
must take the full year's course, which must include the required
courses for the year in which he is registered, except that in the
Faculty of Arts and Science and in Agriculture, other subjects
may be substituted for the required courses if credit for these has
already been obtained.
The standing of students taking more than the required number
of units shall be determined on the basis of the required number of
units to be chosen in a manner most advantageous to the students.
6. Winners of more than one scholarship will be given recognition in the published lists. Unless otherwise specified in the
Calendar notice, no student may enjoy the proceeds of more than
one scholarship in the same academic year, and the scholarships
thus relinquished will be awarded to the candidates next in order
of merit.
7. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign the
monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the University list enables them to retain the honour.    Any funds thus 40 The University of British Columbia
made available will be used for additional scholarships, bursaries,
or student loans.
8. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are
paid in two instalments—on the last day for the payment of fees
in each term. Undergraduate winners must continue their courses
to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned during the session
following the award. A Faculty is authorized, in some cases, to
permit the scholarship to be reserved for one year, provided the
student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance. Application for reservation should be made to the Registrar.
9. In awarding bursaries consideration will be given to the
financial need of the applicant.
10. The Senate of the University of British Columbia reserves
the right so to change the terms under which any exhibition,
scholarship or prize may be established at the University of British
Columbia that the terms may better meet new conditions as they
arise and may more fully carry out the intentions of the donor
and maintain the usefulness of the benefaction. The right so
reserved shall be exercised by a resolution of the Senate duly confirmed by the Board of Governors, provided always that a year's
notice shall be given in Senate of any proposed change and that
the donor or his representatives, if living, shall be consulted about
the proposed change.
11. Limited funds are provided from which loans, not to exceed
$100, may be made to undergraduate students who have completed
satisfactorily two years' University work and who can show they
are in need of pecuniary assistance. Interest at the rate of 5 per
cent, per annum is charged on these loans. They must be secured
by approved joint promissory note given for a definite term and
signed by the applicant and his parent or guardian. Loans are
not granted to graduate students, to students in the Teacher
Training Course, nor to students in diploma courses. Applications
for loans should be addressed to the Bursar of the University.
12. The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding post-graduate scholarships, fellowships and assist-
antships which other Universities and various research bodies make
available.   This information may be obtained from the Registrar.
13. Endowed scholarships and bursaries will be paid provided
the invested funds produce the necessary revenue. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 41
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-
General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at
the head of the graduating class for the B.A. degree. Honour and
pass students are eligible for this medal.
The Kiwanis Club Gold Medal
A gold medal, given by the Kiwanis Club of Vancouver, will
be awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating
class for the B.Com. degree.
The medal will normally be awarded to an Honours student,
but if there is no outstanding Honours student, this medal may
be awarded to a pass student.
The French Government Medal
A bronze medal, offered by the French Consul for Western
Canada on behalf of the French Government, will be awarded to
a student of the French language on the recommendation of the
Head of the Department of Modern Languages.
The United Empire Loyalists' Association Medal*
The Vancouver Branch of the United Empire Loyalists' Association of Canada is 'offering a silver medal for the best essay
received during the Session 1935-36 on any topic dealing with the
history of the United Empire Loyalists and their influence on the
development of Canada.
The award will be made on the recommendation of the Department of History, the competition being open to all undergraduates
of the University, preference being given to students enrolled in a
Canadian History course.
The Lefevre Gold Medal and Scholarship
Out of funds provided by Mrs. Lefevre in memory of her late
husband, Dr. J. M. Lefevre, a gold medal and scholarship will be
awarded annually to the student standing highest in general proficiency and research ability in one of the following courses: (a)
Honours in Chemistry in the Faculty of Arts and Science; (b)
Chemistry, or (c) Chemical Engineering, in the Faculty of Applied
Science. The award will be based upon the work of the last two
years in these courses. The winning of this scholarship will not
preclude the holder from enjoying the proceeds of a further award.
•See Page 39. 42 The University of British Columbia
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR GRADUATES
University Graduate Scholarship*
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate student
who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies and who is
proceeding in the following year to post-graduate study in this
or any other approved University.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship*
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's Club
of the University, is open to graduates of this University who
are proceeding in the following year to post-graduate study in
this or any other approved university.
The French Government Scholarship*
A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French Government for one year's post-graduate study in France. It is tenable
for one year and is contingent upon the voting of the credits for
the year by the French Chambers. As this contingency applies to
every item of the French budget, the scholarship may be considered
as permanent.
The award is made by the French Consul for Western Canada,
residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of the Head of the
Department of French in the University.
The Brock Scholarship*
A scholarship of $100, given by Dean R. W. Brock, may be
awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows
special aptitude for post-graduate studies.
The Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship*
Under the revised conditions for the award of the Exhibition
of 1851 Scholarship in Science, the University of British Columbia
is included in the list of universities from which nominations for
scholarships allotted to Canada may be made. These scholarships
of £250 per annum are tenable, ordinarily, for two years. They
are granted only to British subjects under 26 years of age who are
bona fide students of pure or applied science of not less than three
years' standing.
*See Page 39. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 43
The Dr. F. J. Nicholson Scholarships*
Out of the proceeds of a fund donated by Dr. Francis John
Nicholson, the following scholarships will be awarded annually
for the purpose of enabling students to do graduate study in the
University of British Columbia or in any other approved University: (1) One scholarship of the value of $500.00 for graduate
work in Chemistry. Applicants must be Honours Graduates in
Chemistry of the Faculty of Arts and Science, with the degree of
B.A. or M.A., or graduates in Chemistry or Chemical Engineering
of the Faculty of Applied Science, with the degree of B.A.Sc. or
M.A.Sc. (2) One scholarship of the value of $500.00 for graduate
work in Geology. Applicants must be graduates of the Faculty of
Applied Science in Geological or Mining Engineering, with the
degree of B.A.Sc. or M.A.Sc
Normally the scholarships will be payable in two instalments
of $250.00 each to provide for two years of graduate work. The
payment of the second instalment will be subject to approval by
the University of British Columbia of the first year's graduate
work. In exceptional circumstances the full sum of $500.00 may
be made available for work to be completed in a single year.
Recipients must be qualified to undertake graduate and research
work, in respect of scholarship, ability, character and health.
These scholarships will be granted with due consideration for the
financial status of the candidate. The spirit of the endowment is
to aid those to whom financial help is necessary or of material
assistance in furthering their studies.
Applicants must be graduates of the University of British
Columbia, have British citizenship and be not more than 30 years
of age at the date of award. Preference will be given in making
awards to native-born British Columbians.
The Carnegie Corporation Scholarships*
Under a grant made to the University of British Columbia by
the Carnegie Corporation of New York, a sum of money has been
made available for the purpose of enabling students of marked
ability to do graduate study in the University of British Columbia
or in any other approved University, and to provide equipment
(books, apparatus and supplies) required for such graduate work
in the University of British Columbia.
Applicants must be undergraduate students or graduates of the
University of British Columbia, with First Class standing in
the examinations last written, and must have reached the last year
of the course in which they are registered, or must hold one or
•See Page 39. 44 The University of British Columbia
more of the following degrees: B.A., B.Com., M.A., B.A.Sc,
M.A.Sc, B.S.A., M.S.A. Applicants must not be more than 30
years of age on the last day for receiving applications.
Individual scholarship awards, including equipment, etc., will
be made in accordance with the ascertained requirements of the
applicant in the proposed course of study, and shall not in any
individual case exceed the sum of $300.00. Normally not more
than $200.00 will be awarded to scholarship winners pursuing
their work in the University of British Columbia. Additional
grants in excess of this sum may be made to scholars to defray
expenses incidental to carrying on of their work under direction
of the University of British Columbia elsewhere than at the
University.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1.   IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship*
A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at the University of Oxford
and may be held for three years. Since, however, the majority
of Rhodes Scholars obtain standing which enables them to take a
degree in two years, appointments are made for two years in the
first instance, and a Rhodes Scholar who may wish to remain for
a third year will be expected to present a definite plan of study
for that period satisfactory to his College and to the Rhodes
Trustees.
Rhodes Scholars may be allowed, if the conditions are approved
by their own College and by the Oxford Secretary to the Rhodes
Trustees, either to postpone their third year, returning to Oxford
for it after a period of work in their own countries, or to spend
their third year in post-graduate work at any University of Great
Britain, and in special cases at any University on the continent of
Europe, the overseas Dominions, or in the United States, but not
in the country of their origin.
The stipend of a Rhodes Scholarship is fixed at £400 per year.
At most colleges, and for most men, this sum is not sufficient to
meet a Rhodes Scholar's necessary expenses for Term-time and
Vacations, and Scholars who can afford to supplement it by say
£50 per year from their own resources will find it advantageous
to do so.
•See Page 39. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes
A candidate to be eligible must:
1. Be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile in
Canada and unmarried. He must have passed his nineteenth, but not have passed his twenty-fifth birthday on
October 1st of the year for which he is elected.
2. Have reached such a stage in his course at one of the Universities of Canada that he will have completed at least
two years at the University in question by October 1st of
the year for which he is elected.
Candidates may apply either for the Province in which they
have their ordinary private domicile, home, or residence, or for
any Province in which they have received at least two years of
their college education before applying.
In that section of the will in which he defined the general type
of scholar he desired, Mr. Rhodes wrote as follows:
"My desire being that the students who shall be elected to the
Scholarships shall not be merely bookworms, I direct that in the
election of a student to a Scholarship regard shall be had to:
1. His literary and scholastic attainments.
2. His fondness for and success in manly outdoor sports such
as cricket, football and the like.
3. His qualities of manhood, truth, courage, devotion to duty,
sympathy for and protection of the weak, kindliness, unselfishness and fellowship, and
4. His exhibition during school days of moral force of character
and of instincts to lead and to take an interest in his schoolmates, for those latter attributes will be likely in after life
to guide him to esteem the performance of public duties as
his highest aim.''
Full particulars can be obtained from Sherwood Lett, Esq.,
626 Pender Street West, Vancouver, B. C, Secretary of the Selection Committee for the Province of British Columbia.
Each candidate for a Scholarship is required to make application to the Secretary of the Committee of Selection of the province
in which he wishes to compete not later than October 31st. Application forms may be obtained from the Registrar's office or from
the Secretary of the Selection Committee.
University Great War Scholarships*
Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded, on the basis
of the work of the First Year, to returned soldiers, their dependents and the children of deceased soldiers proceeding to a higher
year.
•See Page 39. 46 The University of British Columbia
2.   IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year. These scholarships
will be awarded respectively: 1. To the student standing highest
with majors in group (a). (See page 66.) 2. To the student
standing highest with majors in group (b). (See page 67.)
Students taking full honours in Mathematics will be classified in
group (a).
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be
awarded on the basis of the work of the Second Year to students
proceeding to a higher year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarshipt
This scholarship of $125, founded by friends of the late James
Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of
McGill University College, Vancouver, will be awarded upon the
results of the examination of the Second Year in Arts and Science
to the undergraduate student standing highest in any two of three
courses, English 2, Latin 2, Greek (A or 2), and proceeding to the
work of a higher year.
The McGill Graduates' Scholarshipt
A scholarship of $125, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society
of British Columbia, will be awarded to the student standing highest in English and French of the Second Year in Arts and Science
and proceeding to a higher year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, founded by the members of the Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the Club who lost
their lives in the Great War, will be awarded to the student standing highest in English 2 and Economics 2 in the Second Year in
Arts and Science and proceeding to a higher year.
The Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire
Scott Memorial Scholarship*
This scholarship of $100—the proceeds of an endowment of
$2,000—founded by the Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire
of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain Robert Falcon
Scott, R.N., the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his life in the
•See Page 39.
tOriginally donated to the Royal Institution (See Historical Sketch), this
has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the
University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 47
cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed his Second Year
in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding in the Third Year to
Honour work either in Biology or in a course including Biology.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Arts and Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student taking
first place in the examinations of the First Year in Arts and
Science, and proceeding to a higher year.
University Scholarships in Arts and Science
Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded to the students
taking second and third places in the examinations of the First
Year in Arts and Science, and proceeding to a higher year.
The P.E.O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by the Vancouver Chapters of the
P.E.O. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student standing
highest in English 1 in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and
Science.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100.00, given by His Honour Judge Cayley
and Mrs. Cayley in memory of their son, Beverley Cayley, Arts '18,
and continued under the terms of the will of the late Mrs. Cayley,
will be awarded to the male student standing highest in English 1
in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
The I. J. Klein Scholarship
This annual scholarship of $100, given by I. J. Klein, Esq.,
Vancouver, B. C, for ten years, beginning in May, 1930, will be
awarded to the student obtaining first place in the examinations
of the Third Year of the course in Commerce.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, the proceeds of a fund created by the
Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded to the undergraduate obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian History
(History 2 or 20).
The Summer Session Students' Association Scholarship
A scholarship of $30, given by the Summer Session Students'
Association, will be awarded to the Summer Session student who
completes the second year with the highest standing. To be eligible 48 The University of British Columbia
a student must have taken his entire second year at The University
of British Columbia Summer Session or Extra-sessional classes and
must continue in his third year at The University of British
Columbia.
The British Columbia Teachers' Federation
Scholarship
A scholarship of $50 given by the British Columbia Teachers'
Federation will be awarded to a Summer Session student, who,
being a member of the British Columbia Teachers' Federation,
completes the third year with the highest standing. To be eligible
a student must have taken his entire third year at The University
of British Columbia Summer Session or Extra-sessional classes and
must continue in his fourth year at The University of British
Columbia.
3.    IN APPLIED SCIENCE
University Scholarship in Nursing and Health*
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency
in previous work of University grade (which must include a
minimum of two years' work in the Province of British Columbia),
to a student proceeding to the Third Year (or in the double course,
proceeding to the Fourth Year) of the Course in Nursing and
Health and having successfully completed the hospital probationary
period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not later than
December 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, given by the Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded to the student who attains the highest
standing in the first four years' training, academic and practical
(or in the first five years' training, academic and practical, in the
double course) of the Nursing and Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarshipt
A scholarship of $150, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir,
"will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in
the Mining Engineering Course of the Fourth Year in Applied
Science, and proceeding to the work of the Fifth Year.
•See Page 39
tOriginally donated to the Royal Institution (See Historical Sketch), this
has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the
University of British Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 49
University Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding
to the Fourth Year in Applied Science, the award to be based on
the work of the Third Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship in Applied Science
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency
in the work of the Second Year in Applied Science.
The G. M. Dawson Scholarship
A scholarship of $50 will be awarded to the undergraduate
student standing highest in the Geological Engineering course, in
Geological subjects, in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
Science, and proceeding to the work of the Fifth Year.
The B'nai B'rith Auxiliary No. 77 Scholarship
A scholarship of $50, given by the Women's Auxiliary No. 77 of
the B'nai B'rith, will be awarded to the student in Fourth Year
Applied Science standing highest in the class of Chemical Engineering or Chemistry and proceeding to the work of the Fifth Year.
4.    IN AGRICULTURE
University Scholarship in Agriculture
A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to a
student proceeding to a higher year, the award to be based on the
work of the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100 will be awarded to a
student proceeding to a higher year, the award to be based on the
work of the Second Year.
MATRICULATION  SCHOLARSHIPS
University Senior Matriculation Scholarship
One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results of
the Senior Matriculation Examination to the candidate of highest
standing in the Province.
Royal Institution Senior Matriculation Scholarships
Scholarships of the value of $150 each will be awarded to two
other students upon the results of the Senior Matriculation ex- 50 The University of British Columbia
aminations. One of these scholarships will be for open competition
throughout the Province; the other will be for open competition
in all school districts of the Province other than the City of Vancouver, the City of North Vancouver, the District Municipalities
of North Vancouver, West Vancouver, and Burnaby, and the City
of New Westminster.
Royal Institution Junior Matriculation Scholarships
Eight General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on the
result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150 to the
candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $150 to
the candidate of next highest standing in each of the following
districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island (exclusive
of Victoria District), and Northern Mainland, (exclusive of North
Vancouver and West Vancouver), (3), Vancouver Central District
(comprising the former limits of the City of Vancouver), together
with West Vancouver and North Vancouver, (4) Part of the Lower
Mainland in the Fraser Harbour area, (5) The Fraser Valley, (6)
Yale, (7) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance
at the University of British Columbia, with the exception that the
Victoria District Junior Matriculation Scholarship will be paid
to any winner of that scholarship in attendance at Victoria College.
Winners of all Matriculation Scholarships must notify the
Registrar before September 1st of their intention of attending
the University (or Victoria College in the case of the Victoria
District Junior Matriculation Scholarship) during the following
session; failing such notification, the winner's rights will lapse.
Postponement of Matriculation Scholarships will be granted
only on medical grounds.
PRIZES
1.    IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Essay Prize*
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the
University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary
subject, to be announced at the beginning of the session by the
Department of English.
The Players' Club Prize*
A prize of $50, given by the Players' Club, is offered for an
original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance.   The
•See Page 39. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51
award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club. All entries for
this prize must be in the hands of the Honorary President of the
Players' Club not later than September 30th, 1935.
2.    IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The French Government Book Prize
A book prize, offered by the French Consul for Western Canada
on behalf of the French Government, will be awarded to a student
of the French language on the recommendation of the Bead of
the Department of Modern Languages.
The John Marr Memorial Prize*
A prize of $25, given by Mr. J. F. K. English, known as the
John Marr Memorial Prize, will be awarded to the student, enrolled in the Education class or pursuing graduate work for the
M.A. degree with Education as a Minor, who presents the best
essay on some phase of Secondary Education in this Province.
The essay may be prepared especially for the Prize Competition
or it may be submitted as part of a Course Requirement. It must
be submitted to the Head of the Department of Education not
later than the last day of the sessional examinations.
3.    IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, given by Convocation of The University of
British Columbia, will be awarded to the student in the Fifth
Year of Applied Science whose record, in the opinion of the
Faculty, is the most outstanding.
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, given by the Vancouver
Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of the
late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis
submitted by any Fifth Year student in the Faculty of Applied
Science.
The Engineering Profession's Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by the
Engineering profession in British Columbia (The Association of
Professional Engineers of the Province of B. C.) for competition
by those students in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
•See Page 39. 52 The University of British Columbia
Science who are registered as engineering pupils according to the
by-laws of the Association.
One of these prizes is awarded for the best summer essay in
each of any five branches of engineering, to be selected and specified
by the Faculty.
The five successful essays may be made available by the Faculty
to the Council of the Engineering Profession and, through the
Council, may be referred to or quoted in the literature of the
Profession.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British
Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in the
Course in Public Health Nursing.
The Engineering Institute of Canada Prize
The Engineering Institute of Canada offers an annual prize
of $25 to each of eleven Canadian Universities of which the University of British Columbia is one.
The prize will be awarded to a student of the Fourth Year in
Applied Science on the basis of the marks made in his academic
work in that year. His activities in the students' engineering
organization or in the local branch of a recognized engineering
society will also be considered.
BURSARIES
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Bursary*
This bursary of the annual value of $250 was given by the
Universities Service Club in memory of their comrades who fell
in the Great War. It is named after Captain 0. E. LeRoy, who
commanded the overseas contingent from this University and who
was killed at Passchendaele in 1917.
It will be awarded to a student, or students, requiring financial
assistance to enable him, or them, to attend the University. For
this purpose it may be awarded to a matriculant, to a student of
any year or to a graduate student of the University proceeding to
post-graduate work in this or any approved university. In making
the award preference will be given first to returned soldiers, then
to the dependents of soldiers, and finally to suitable candidates
from the student body at large.
Application must contain a statement of the academic record
and special circumstances of the applicant, with two supporting
•See Page 39. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53
references, and, in the case of the preferred categories, of the war
record of the soldier.
The award will be made by the Senate upon the recommendation
of the Faculties acting in consultation with the Executive or accredited representatives of the Universities Service Club.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian
Association Memorial Fund Bursaries*
A sum of money given to the University by the administrators
of the Khaki University of Canada provides a fund from which
are awarded annually ten bursaries of the value of $100 each,
known as the Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association Memorial Bursaries.
Under conditions specified by the donors these bursaries may
be used for undergraduate purposes only, and in making the awards
a preference is given to the sons and daughters of the soldiers of
the Great War. The financial necessities of candidates are also
taken into account.
To be eligible for an award a soldier's dependent must obtain
at least second class standing, i.e. 65 per cent.; for all others 75
per cent, is required.
Dependents of soldiers and others who have expectations of
attaining standing as stated above and who are in need of financial
assistance should apply to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations.
These bursaries are open to students from Victoria College
proceeding to a course of study in this University.
Application forms may be obtained in the Registrar's Office.
The American Woman's Club Bursary*
A bursary of $125, given by the American Woman's Club of
Vancouver will be available for 1935-36 to assist a woman undergraduate who has completed at least one year in Arts and Science
with satisfactory standing, and who could not otherwise continue
her course. Application must be made to the Registrar not later
than September 1st.
The University Women's Club Bursary*
A bursary of $100 given by the University Women's Club of
Vancouver will be available for a woman student of high scholastic
•See Page 39. 54: The University op British Columbia
standing in the Third Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science who
is proceeding to the work of the Fourth Year.
The David Thom Bursaries
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of $160 is
available annually for the following bursaries:
1. A sum of $100 to be awarded to the junior or senior matriculant with the highest standing who is registering for the first
time in the Faculty of Agriculture. In the awarding of this
bursary Regulation 9 under General Regulations for Medals,
Scholarships and Prizes does not apply.
*2. A sum of $60 to be awarded to a student who has satisfactorily
completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and is
proceeding to the work of a higher year.
The Inter-Sorority Alumnae Club Bursary*
A bursary of $150, given by the Inter-Sorority Alumnae Club of
Vancouver, will be awarded to a woman student of satisfactory
academic standing, proceeding to her Junior or Senior Year or to
the Education Class, or, if a graduate, to the Social Service Diploma
Course. The award will be made on the recommendation of the
Dean of Women, to whom applications should be sent on forms
available in the Registrar's office.
Special Bursaries Fund*
For the Session 1935-36 a Special Bursaries Fund has been
made available by the Board of Governors to enable students to
attend the University who would not otherwise be able to do so.
To be eligible for an award from this fund a student must have
attained at least Second Class standing in the examinations last
written, and must give evidence of need.
A part of this fund is set aside for the benefit of sons and
daughters of soldiers of the Great War who are entfering the
University for the first time.
Applications for these bursaries must be in the hands of the
Registrar not later than October 1st, 1935. Application forms may
be obtained in the Registrar's office.
LOANS
General Loan Fund
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants made
by the Board of Governors. Its operation is described in paragraph
11 under General Regulations for Medals, Scholarships, Prizes, etc
•See Page 39. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy,
B. C. Division, Fund
This is a fund of $100, given by the Canadian Institute of
Mining and Metallurgy to the University as a trust to be used for
loans to students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans
must be recommended by the Departments of Geology, Mining and
Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $1500 has been
set aside for loans to students in Agriculture who have been unable
to borrow from the General Loan Fund or who have obtained loans
from that fund insufficient for their needs; of this amount, $300 is
available for students in the Occupational Course and the balance
for Third and Fourth Year students.   I  THE
FACULTY )
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS:  A, Arts; Ag, Agr
Mornings
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
S800
Ap204
A 103
106, 203,
206
A 100
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 205
A 207
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S200
Botany 2	
Biology 2	
Biology 8	
Botany 6 e 	
Chemistry 12	
Economics 6	
Education 	
English 1	
English 13	
AplOl
Botany 4	
AplOl
SSOO
AplOO
Ap204
A 100
106, 205,
206
A 101,
104,105,
207
Ap 102
A 108
A 201
A 204
A 108
A 102
A 208
S200
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
Botany 6 e	
Chemistry 12	
Economics 6	
Ap 101
Economics 17	
S800
English 1	
Ap204
English 1	
English 13  _.
French 2,
Sees, e, i, g, h	
A 103,
106, 203,
206
A 100
9
French 2
Geology 5 and 12	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d	
Geology 4	
A 101
104, 105,
Geology 4	
Greek A _	
German 1, Sec. a	
108
German 4	
History 2	
Latin 2 a	
Latin 5	
Mathematics 12	
Physics 2._	
Zoology 2	
Zoology 8	
Ap 102
Greek A __	
History 15	
A 102
A   205
Latin 7.....	
A  207
Mathematics 8	
Mathematics 10„_ .,
Mathematics 16	
Philosophy l a, Sec. 1
Physics 1 _	
A 204
A 208
A 201
Philosophy l a. Sec. 1...
Physics 1	
Ap 100
SSOO
Botany 6 d	
Chemistry 8	
Economics l, Sec. 1	
Economics ».._	
Economics 18	
Education	
English 9	
French 3 b   	
French 4 b	
Geology 1  	
History 10	
Ap 101
S800
S400
A 201
A 102
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
AplOO
A 108
A 101
A 106
203, 205,
206
Ap202
A 103
S210
A 207
Ap 101
Ap 101
S417
A 100
A 108
Ap 202
A 204
A 104
Apl02
A 203
A 108
A 206
A 201
A 105,
106, 205
A 102
A 207
Botany 6 c	
Chemistry 9	
Botany 6 b and d.
Chemistry 8	
Economics 1, Sec. 1	
Economics 19 	
Education 	
English 9	
French 8 b	
French 4 b	
Geology 1	
Geology 7	
History 10	
History 20	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4	
Philosophy la. Sec. 2...
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2	
Ap 101
SSOO
Economical, Sec. 8 ~
S400
A 201
Education	
English 10	
A 102
A 204
French 4 a	
A 100
Geology 2	
A 104
10
German 1, Sec. b	
Government 1
History 1 and 2	
A 105
AplOO
Ap 106
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4.	
Philosophy 1 a. Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7	
A 101
A 106,
Mathematics 13	
208, 205,
Ap202
Sociology 8	
A 103
Sociology 8	
A 207
Agricultural
Economics	
Ag 104
AplOO
S417'
S 400
S 200
Ap202
A 103
A105, 106
108, 206
A 201
Ap 102
A 205
A 208
A 100
A 203
A 101
A 204
A 102
S210
AplOl
Botany 1	
Ap 101
Ap285
S800
S417
Ap 100
A 100
A 206
S200
A 104,
105, 108,
208
106, 208
A 100
Ap 102
A 201
A 207
A 103
A 101
A 205
Ap 101
Agricultural
Agl04
AplOO
S417
S 400
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2
Chemistry 4	
Economics 1, See. 4
Botany 5 a and c	
Chemistry 7	
Economics 1, Sec. 2
Economics 5	
Botany 6 b 	
Chemistry 7  	
Economics 1, Sec, 2	
Economics 5 	
English 19	
Ap 202
11
English 14	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
French 8 a	
Geography 5
Geology 8	
Government 2	
History 13	
Latin 1     	
Philosophy 6	
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1	
English 14	
French 1,
A 108
French 1
Sees, a, b, c, d	
French 4 e	
Geology 8_	
German, Beg., Sec. a...
Government 4	
History 4	
History 11.	
History 19	
Mathematics 2	
Philosophy 8	
Physics S	
A 105,
French 4e _-.
Geology 8	
German, Beg. Sec. a	
Government 4..._	
History 4	
History 11	
History 19	
Mathematics 2	
Philosophy 8
Physics 5 ,
Zoology 1	
206
A 201
Apl02
A 205
A 208
A 100
A 203
A 101
A 204
A 102
S210
Ap 101
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR —1935-36
AND SCIENCE
iculture; Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
Mornings
Thursday
'Botany 2	
Economics 2	
Economics 17
Education	
English 1	
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
Geology 5 and 12.
German 1, Sec. a
German 4	
History 2..._ 	
Latin 2 a 	
Latin 5 	
Mathematics 12...
Physics 2 	
Zoology 2 	
Zoology 3	
Botany 8	
Botany 6 c.	
Chemistry »....	
Economics 1, Sec 8
Economics 4_	
Education	
English 10	
French 4 a. _.
Geology 2_
German 1, Sec. b„
Government l	
History l and 2	
Latin 2 b...
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7	
Mathematics 18..
Philosophy 2	
Botany 1 	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2...
Chemistry 4 	
Economics 1, Sec. 4..
Economics 10 	
Education  	
English 19	
French l,
Sees, e, t, g, h._	
French 8 a. 	
Geography 5  	
Geology 6	
Government 2	
History 18 	
Latin 1	
Philosophy 8	
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1
Zoology 7 	
Room
SSOO
AplOO
Ap204
A 100,
106, 205,.
206
A 101,
104, 109,
207
Apl02
A 108
A 201
A 204
A 108
A 102
A 208
S200
Ap 101
AplOl
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 100
A 108
Ap202
A 204
A 104
Apl02
A 208
A 108
A 206
A 201
A 105,
106, 20S
A 102
A 207
AplOl
SSOO
S417
AplOO
A 100
A 206
S200
A 104,
105, 108,
208
A106, 208
A 100
Apl02
A 201
A 207
A 108
A 101
A 205
AplOl
Friday
Biology 2	
Botany 6 f.	
Economics 6..
Education	
English 1	
English 18	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c d...
Geology 4...
Greek A...
History 15.
Latin 7..
Mathematics 8 _
Mathematics 10...
Mathematics 18	
Philosophy l b, Sec. 1
Physics 1 _	
Chemistry 2 	
Economics l, Sec. 1	
Economics 9 	
Economics 19	
Education 	
English 9 	
French 8 b 	
French 4 b. 	
Geology 7    	
History 10	
History 20 .._	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4	
Philosophy l b. Sec. 2.
Philosophy 8, Sec 2	
Sociology 8	
Agricultural
Economics   Ag 104
Botany 5 a 	
Economics 1, Sec. 2  S 400
Economics *.._  S 200
Education    Ap 202
English 14    A 108
French 1, A105,108,
Sees, a, b, c d_  108, 206
French 4 e  _  A 201
Geology 8  Ap 102
German, Beg. Sec. a  A 205
Government 4..  A 208
History 4  A 100
History 11  A 208
History 19  A 101
Mathematics 2  A 204
Philosophy 8  A 102
Physics 5 _ :...... S 210
Zoology 6  Ap 101
Zoology 5  Ap 101
Room
AplOl
AplOl
S800
Ap204
A 108,
106, 208,
206
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Apl02
A 102
A 205
A 207
A 204
A 208
A 201
AplOO
S200
S800
S400
A 201
A 102
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
Apl08
A 108
A 101
A 106,
203, 205,
206
Ap 202
A108
A 207
Saturday
Botany 5 b Lab.......
Chemistry fl Lab-
Economics 2 	
Economics 17..„	
Education 	
English 1 _	
French 2,
A 101,
Sees, e, t, g, h.	
104,109
207
3eology 10	
German 1, Sec. a	
A 108
German 4	
A 201
History 2 _	
A 204
Latin 2 a...	
A 108
Latin 5  	
A 102
Mathematics 12	
A 208
Physics 2	
S200
Botany 5 b Lab.	
Chemistry 9 Lab.	
Economics 1, Sec. I.
Economics 4	
Education 	
English 10	
French 4 a. 	
Geology 10...	
German 1, Sec b	
Government l	
History l and 2	
Latin 2 b	
Mathematics l.
Sees. 5, 6, 7 	
Mathematics 18	
Philosophy 2	
Botany 9 b Lab.	
Chemistry 1, Sec 2...
Chemistry 9 Lab......
Economics 1, Sec 4.
Economics 10	
Education.™ _	
English 19 	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
French 8 a _	
Geography 5	
Geology 10	
Government 2	
History 18 	
Latin 1  	
Philosophy 8, Sec 1
Philosophy 6  	
Room
S800
AplOO
Ap204
A 100,
106, 205,
206
A 100
A 108
Ap202
A 204
A 104
aTos"
A 108
A 206
A 201
A 105,
106, 205
A 102
A20T
SSOO
AplOO
A100-
A 206
S200
A 104,
105,108,
208
A. 106, 208
A 100
A 201
A20T
A 108
A 205
A 101
10
11
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE TIME TABLE
Afternoons
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Botany 8 Lab.	
Bacteriology l and 2
Botany 2  _
Botany 4	
Botany 6 e	
Education 1	
English 20	
Geology 1 Lab._	
Botany 8 Lab 	
Botany 5 a and c.	
Botany 6 c Lab	
Botany 5 c Lab.	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a and b—	
S800
_..__.
A 100
AplOO
A 104,
105
A 204
A 207
A 201
Ap202
S210
aToo"
A 104
Apioe
A 106,
203, 205,
206
	
Chemistry 1, Sec 1
Education 	
SSOO
A 108
English 2 a	
French l,
Sees, i, j	
A 100,
French 1,
Sees, i, j	
French 4 e	
Latin 8 	
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9	
Statistics 1	
Zoology 5 Lab.    .....
AplOO
A 104,
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 8, 4	
105
French 4 e 	
A 204
1
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 1...
Economics 18	
Economics 14	
Zoology 2 Lab.	
Zoology 8 Lab.	
Geology 7 Lab.,     	
Latin 8 _ ..	
AplOO
A 207
Ap "T"
A 102
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9 _
Statistics 1 	
A 201
Ap202
Ap208
 	
Zoology 6 Lab.	
Bacteriology 1 and 2
Botany 8 Lab. 	
Bacteriology l and 2
Biology 1, See. 1	
Botany 2	
Botany 4	
Botany 6 e	
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Education	
English 1	
XiST
A 100,
106, 205,
206
Ap~106
A 208
A 208
Botany 8 Lab. _	
Botany ec Lab	
Education. .._ 	
A 106
Chemistry 7 Lab	
English 16. 	
English 16 ,
French 4 c__ _ 	
Geology 7 Lab.    	
Geography l     	
German, Beg. Sec c	
German 2
A 206
A 106
A 206
A 203
AplOO
A 205
A 207
A 100
A 101
S210
A 20*
AplOS
AplOO
A 205
German, Beg. Sec. e
A 207
History 1... _. ...
A 100
2
History 1  	
History 14 	
A 101
Philosophy 1 e._	
Sociology 1         . ...
Statistics 1	
Zoology 5 Lab.	
Zoology 6 Lab.. 	
S210
A 108
Physics 5 Lab  	
Latin 8 B	
Ap208
A 103
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 1...
Bacteriology 1 and 2
Chemistry 1 Lab.,   1
	
Ap 120
A 100
Apl02
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
Chemistry 4 Lab.	
3
Chemistry 2 Lab. a 	
Chemistry 7 Lab _
A 100
ATo2
Geology 6 Lab	
Geology 5 ...    	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec 1_
Zoology 2 Lab	
Zoology 8 Lab 	
Physics 5 Lab 	
 	
Zoology 6 Lab	
Bacteriology 1 and 2
Botany 1 Lab. 	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
„
Biology 1, Sec. 2 -.
Botany 2 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b 	
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Apl20
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Chemistry 7 Lab 	
Economics 15  	
Physics 5 Lab 	
Zoology 5 Lab... 	
Zoology 6 Lab. 	
4
	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a, b.	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
	
Biology 1 Lab. 2  	
Botany 2 Lab 	
Botany 4 Lab. - 	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
5
=zz
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR —Continued
Afternoons
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Bacteriology 1 and 2
Biology 1, Sec. 8	
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 1, Sec. 5	
Biology 3	
Botany 5 a and c
Botany 6 d Lab..	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1	
Chemistry 8 Lab. a	
Education       	
English 2 a	
s soT
T'io's"
A 100,
AplOO
A 104,
105
A 204
"A207
A 201
Ap202
 -
Chemistry 3 Lab	
Education 1	
English 20	
Geology 1 Lab.	
"a'ioo
A 104
Apll2
A 105,
106, 205
Ap "T"
Ap 212
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7. _.„
Physics 8 Lab., Sec 2...
French 1,
Sees, i, j	
French 4 e	
Geology 2 Lab	
Latin 3    	
Philosophy 7	
Philosophy 9 	
Zoology 7 Lab	
1
Bacteriology 1 and 2	
Biology 1, Sec. 8	
Botany 4. 	
Biology 2, Sec. 5	
Botany 5 a and c	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 3 Lab. a	
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Education       	
English 16        	
French 4 c       	
Geography 1
Geology 2 Lab	
Geology 8         	
German, Beg. Sec. c   .
German 2	
History 1	
History 14	
	
Botany 7._ _	
A 104
A 108,
106, 205,
206
A 106
English 1	
A 106
A 206
A 208
AplOO
English 2 c	
2
A 203
Latin 8 A.    	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec 2...
Economics 18	
A 205
A 207
A100
A 101
S210
A 103
Ap "T"
Ap212
A 208
Biology 1, Sec 4   .
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 1, Sec. 6	
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
1
Chemistry l Lab.,
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
3
Education 2 __	
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 2
A100
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 4 Lab...	
 —
A 100
A 104
English 24 _	
Biology 1, Sec. 6...	
Biology 8	
Zoology 1 Lab.	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e...	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
Chemistry 4 Lab	
4
A 104
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
5
Chemistry 2 Lab. a	
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE  FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts (B.A.),
Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com.), and Master of Arts (M.A.).
Courses which do not lead to degrees are offered in Teacher
Training and Social Service.
*COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a General
Course degree. A General Course degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations. No distinction is made between General
Course and Honour students in the First and Second Years, except
as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and Fourth
Years there are special requirements for Honour Students.
Students holding the degree of B.Com. from this University
may proceed to the degree of B.A. in one year by completing 15
additional units of work open to students in their Third and Fourth
Years, provided that their additional units are chosen so as to
complete the requirements for the B.A. degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as to
cover the requirements for both degrees.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc, or B.A. and
B.A.Sc. (in Nursing).
Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the First or
Second Year of the "Winter Session; nor for more than 18 units
in the Third or Fourth Year. (See regulations under "First and
Second Years" and "Third and Fourth Years.")
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (sm "University
Summer Session") may be combined with Winter Session credits
to complete the 60 units required for the degree of B.A.; but not
more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two academic
years subsequent to Junior Matriculation nor more than 15 in the
academic year subsequent to Senior Matriculation. The degree of
B.A. will not be granted within three years from Senior Matriculation nor within four years from Junior Matriculation.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any one
Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for work other
than that of the regular Summer and Winter Sessions is 3 units
•The University reserves the right to limit the registration in, or to cancel,
any of the courses listed in this Faculty. Limitation may be imposed if the
numbers desiring any course are found to be too large for the lecture rooms
and laboratories available for that course, or for the number of instructors in
the Department concerned, or for the equipment and supplies which can be
obtained. Certain courses may be cancelled if the numbers of instructors in
the Departments concerned prove to be inadequate to offer all the courses listed. 64 Faculty of Arts and Science
in each academic year, and 15 units in all subsequent to Senior
Matriculation or First Year Arts.
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities
in the same academic year in which work has been attempted at
this University, whether in the Summer Session or in the Winter
Session or otherwise. Extra-mural work done at other universities
prior to registration at this University may be accepted, if approved
by the Faculty, but may not exceed 3 units in respect of any one
academic year or 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation.
If a student is granted credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere,
the number of units which he may take at this University without
attendance at a Winter or Summer Session will be correspondingly
reduced.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend at
least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period
of not less than two or more than three hours) each week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory
periods) throughout a single term.
Note 1:—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges
who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their
intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer in each
year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects set down
in the Calendar for the Year and the course in which they are
registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent of three
units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature,
New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics and
Apologetics.
Note 2:—Students who intend to enter Normal School at any
time before or after graduation are reminded they will have to
meet the requirements for Normal Entrance in Health IV,
Geography II, Arithmetic II and Art I.
First and Second Years
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30 units,
15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must be chosen in
conformity with the requirements that follow. Details of courses
are given under the various departments.
•Each student must take: Units
(a)  English 1 in the First Year and English 2 in the
Second Year       6
t(6) The first two courses in a language offered for
Matriculation, one course in each year     6
•For credit that can be given for Senior Matriculation standing, complete
or partial, see Page 30.
tSee  Regulation   "2." First and Second Years 65
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year     3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 4, or Philosophy
1 (a) or 1 (b)     3
(e) Biology  1,   or   Chemistry  1,   or  Geology  1,  or
Physics 1, or Physics 2     3
(/)   Three courses—not already chosen—selected from
the following:
Biology 1 (a), Botany 1, Chemistry 1, Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, Economics
10, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1,
Geology 2, tBeginners' German, German 1,
German 2, Greek A, Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 4, Latin 1, Latin 2 (a), Latin
2 (b), Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Philosophy 1 (a), Philosophy 1 (b), Physics 1 or
Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1     9
Note:—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and 2,
Geography 1, Economics 10, History 4 and
Philosophy 1 (b) are not open to First Year
students. Economics 1, and Philosophy 1 are
open to First Year students only if the permission of the Heads of these departments is
obtained. History 2 is open to First Year
students only if they are preparing for entrance to the Normal School. Geography 1,
Geology 1, and Philosophy 1 (b), normally
Third Year subjects, may be taken by Second
Year students (Full Undergraduate and Conditioned). Geology 1 must be taken in the
Second Year by students intending to take the
Honour course in Geology.
2. Students who have not matriculated in German may fulfil
the language requirements for the degree by taking Beginners'
German, German 1 and German 2. Such students will be required
to complete 63 units. The extra three units may be taken in any
year.
3. No student in his First Year may elect more than one
beginners' course in a language, and no beginners' course in a
language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second
year's work in that language.
4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in a
language may be taken by a student who has not offered that
tSee Regulations "3" and "4." 66 Faculty of Arts and Science
language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in a language may
not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained credit for
that language at Matriculation.
Greek A (which may be taken by students having no previous
knowledge of Greek), followed by Greek 2, will be accepted as
satisfying the Language requirements in the case of students who
have matriculated in Latin.
5. A student taking three languages in the first two years may
defer the course selected under Section 1 (e) to the Third or
Fourth Year, and a student taking four science courses may defer
the course selected under Section 1 (d) to the Third or Fourth
Year.
6. Students who intend to enter the Teacher Training Course
are advised to take Philosophy 1 in the First or Second Year.
Note:—Students thinking of entering Applied Science are
referred to the list of subjects required to be taken by them in
First Year Arts and to the regulations in reference to these, given
under "Admission" and "General Outline of Courses" in Applied
Science. They are advised to attend the noon hour talks on the
choice of a profession and on the life and work in vocations likely
to appeal to Applied Science graduates.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit to
the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year, a
scheme of the courses they propose io take during the last two
years. m^
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist of
30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year, not
less than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined by the
results of the Third and Fourth Years combined.
General Course Curriculum
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major subjects,
not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum1 of 6 units in some
other subject or subjects of the Third and Fourth Years. Work
in the First or Second Year is required in each of the Major
subjects, except Education and Bacteriology. Both Major subjects
must be chosen from one of the following groups:
' "(o) Bacteriology,  Botany,   Chemistry,   Geology,   Mathematics,
Physics, Zoology. Third and Fourth Years 67
(b) Economics, Education (not more than six units), English,
French, German, Government, Greek, History, Latin,
Mathematics, Philosophy.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth Years,
are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second Year
courses may be taken in the combined Third and Fourth Years.
In a number of these courses extra reading will be required of
Third and Fourth Year students.
When two First or Second Year subjects, other than a Beginners' Language or Language 1, are taken in the Third and Fourth
Years, not more than one of these subjects may be outside the
departments in which the student is doing his major work.
For the purpose of this regulation the following subjects are
considered Third and Fourth Year subjects: Philosophy lb,
Geography 1, Geology 1, Geology 2, German 2 if preceded by Beginners' German and German 1, Mathematics 4, and Botany 1
or.Zoology 1 if both are taken.
4. No credit will be given for a language course normally taken
in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and continued
in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are intended for
Honour students only.        ^ 4^
5. Students in the Third and Fourth Years may, with the
consent of the departments concerned, take one or two courses of
private reading (each to count not more than 3 units), provided
that:
1. (a) The candidate for a reading course shall have com
pleted his First and Second Years and shall have taken
at least 6 units either of Second or Third Year work
or of Second and Third Year work in the subject in
which the reading course is taken; and
(b) shall have made an average of at least Second Class in
the 6 units in question.
2. Both reading courses shall not be chosen in the same subject.
3. A reading course shall not be taken concurrently with Extra-
Sessional or with Summer Session courses except by a
student in the Fourth Year.
Credit for a course of private reading is part of the maximum
Of 15 units which may be taken in addition to the regular work of
Winter and Summer Sessions; and no other additional work may
be taken in the same academic year. Faculty of Arts and Science
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour
courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned and
of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent
will normally be granted only to those students who have a clear
academic record at the end of their Second Year with at least
Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization.
(Cards of application for admission to Honour courses may be
obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone or in
combination with other departments. For Honours in a single
department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be taken
in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For Honours
in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in each of two
subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
3. Candidates for Honours may, with the consent of the
department concerned, offer a special reading course (to count not
more than 3 units) in addition to the reading courses offered on
page 67, section 5. ^
4. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the
department or departments concerned, be required to present a
graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation that
they have made independently. Credit for the graduating essay
will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units.
5. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their
Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or
both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide.
This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of
his chosen subject or subjects as a whole, and is in addition to the
ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
6. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class.
Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have
not attained a sufficiently high ranking, may be awarded a General
Course degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class
Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned agree;
and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses
a sufficiently high grade.
7. It is hoped to offer the following Honour Courses during the
session 1935-36. But if, for the reasons stated in the footnote to
page 63, it is found impossible to do so, the University reserves
the right to refuse new registrations in any of them. Honour Courses 69
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites: Biology 1 (a), Chemistry 1, Botany 1.
Chemistry 2 and 3, Physics 1 or 2, and Zoology 1 are required
before completion of the course and should be taken as early as
possible.
Required Courses: Botany 3 (a), 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses: Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not
specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses
should be selected in consultation with the department.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites: Biology 1 (a), Chemistry 1, Botany 1.
Physics 1 or 2, Zoology 1, Chemistry 2 and 3 are required
before completion of the course and should be taken as early as
possible.
Required Courses: Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Students specializing in Entomology may substitute Zoology 9
for one of the required courses given above.
Optional Courses: Zoology 4, 7, 8, 9; courses in Botany;
Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department
Chemistry
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and Mathematics 2.
Course:   Candidates are  required  to complete the  following
courses:   Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10.
Classics
Course: Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7; any three of Latin 3, 4,
5, 6; and either Greek 9 or Latin 7.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates
must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek 8 and
Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will be set
on sight translation, and the candidate is advised to pursue a course
of private reading under the supervision of the department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature
and History.
Economics
Prerequisites: A reading knowledge of French or German. A
paper in translation to be written at the end of the Fourth Year
will be required to ensure that this knowledge has been kept up. 70 Faculty of Arts and Science
Course: Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department, to include Economics 4, Economics 9, and
Statistics 1, and two from the following group:
Economics 3, Economics 5, Economics 6, Economics 7, Economics 11, Statistics 2, Government 1, Sociology 1. Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be
arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination, and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in the
Third and Fourth Years.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites: A reading knowledge of French or German. A
paper in translation to be written at the end of the Fourth Year
will be required to ensure that this knowledge has been kept up.
Course: Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department, to include Government 1, Statistics 1> and
three from the following group:
Sociology 1, Sociology 2, Government 2, Government 3, Government 4, Economics 3, Economics 4, Economics 5, Economics 6,
Economics 7, Economics 9, Statistics 2.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial
instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in the
Third and Fourth Years.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisites: 1. A First Class or high Second Class in English
2. Ordinarily, special work is required of students who intend to
take Honours. Sueh work, if required, is announced at the beginning of the session.
2. A reading knowledge of French or German. The Department
may require candidates to write a paper in translation at the end
of the Fourth Year.
Students who intend to take Honours must have the permission
of the Department before beginning the course.
Course: English 25 (involving an examination on the life,
times, and complete works of some major English author), 20,
21 (a), 21 (b), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in
both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the
final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units. The
graduating essay must be submitted on or before March 31. Honour Courses 71
Candidates will be required to take the following final Honours
examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From the beginning to 1500.
2. From 1500 to 1660.
3. From 1660 to 1780.
4. From 1780 to 1890.
One of these examinations will be oral.
In the award of Honours special importance will be attached
to the graduating essay and to the final Honours examinations.
If the candidate's work outside the department does not include
a course in English History, he must take an examination in that
subject.
Geology
Prerequisites: Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 also should
be taken in the Second Year. Chemistry 1 and if possible Physics
1 or 2 should be taken in the First Year, as these are required for
Geology 2 and 7 and are of great value in Geology 1. Biology 1 (a) is
recommended in the Second Year, as it is prerequisite to Zoology
1, which should.be taken in the Third Year as a valuable preparation for Geology 6.
Courses: Eighteen units to be chosen from Geology 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 10, 12. If Geology 2 has not been taken in the Second Year
it must be taken in the Third Year, as it is prerequisite to Geology
7 and 8.
'   History
Course: Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will count
3 units. The Seminar (which carries no credit) must be attended
in the Third and the Fourth Years. A reading knowledge of
French is required.
French
Course:  French 3 (a), 3 (b), 3.(c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (b), 4 (c), in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Latin
Course: Latin 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 and Greek 9. The candidate
must also take Latin 8 in both years, obtaining at least second
class standing. His general knowledge will be tested by papers on
Antiquities, Literature, and History at the end of the Fourth
Year. 72 Faculty of Arts and Science
Mathematics
Prerequisites:  Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course: Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and 5.
A final Honours examination is required.
Physics
Prerequisites:  Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2, Chemistry 1.
Course: Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 5, and 15
additional units. Students are advised to take Chemistry 4 and
7, if possible.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1 (a) ; Botany 1, or
Zoology 1.
Course: Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for either
the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in
Biology.
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 1; Biology 1 (a); Geology 1.
Course: Geology 2 and 6; the required courses for either the
Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in
Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2; Biology 1 (a).
Course: Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and Mathematics 2.
Course: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 5, 8 or 19,
and two units from 7, 10, 12, 13 or 14. Candidates are advised to
take Mathematics 10.
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Geology 1.
Course: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units in
Geology. Honour Courses 73
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Mathematics 2.
Course: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites: Mathematics 2; Physics 1 or 2.
Course: Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics
10, 12 and 17.
Physics 3, 5, 8, and six additional units.
(h) Any Two of
Economies or Economics and Political Science, English, French,
History, Latin, Philosophy.
Economics or Economics and Political Science
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French or German. A
paper in translation to be written at the end of the Fourth Year
will be required to ensure that this knowledge has been kept up.
Course in Economics: Twelve units, including Economics 4,
Economics 9, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if not already taken.
Course in Economics and Political Science: Twelve units,
including Government 1, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if not
already taken.
English
Prerequisites:
1. A First Class or high Second Class in English 2. Ordinarily,
special work is required of students who intend to take Honours.
Such work, if required, is announced at the beginning of the
session.
2. A reading knowledge of French or German. The Department may require candidates to write a paper in translation at
the end of the Fourth Year.
Students who intend to take Honours must have the permission
of the Department before beginning the course.
Course: English 20 and 24, and any three of the English
courses specified for the Third and Fourth Years. The seminar
must be attended during both the final years, but credits which
count for the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the
P'ourth Year. 74 Faculty of Arts and Science
Candidates will be required to take the following final Honours
examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From 1500 to 1660.
2. From 1660 to 1780.
3. From 1780 to 1890.
In the award of Honours special importance will be attached
to these examinations.   One of them will be oral.
The graduating essay, when written for the Department of
English, must be submitted on or before March 31.
French
Course: If the graduating essay is written on a French subject,
3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either these courses
or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (b) are intended primarily for Honour
students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they are
not required to make up the minimum number of units.
History
Prerequisite: A reading knowledge of French.
Course: History 10 and any 9 additional units, of which the
graduating essay, if written in History, will count 3 units.
The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended in
the Third and Fourth Years.
Latin
Course: Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the final year
candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight translation, and
(o) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities. Private reading
under the direction of the department is recommended.
Philosophy
Course: Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in each
year.
COURSE LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.Com.
The degree of B.Com. is granted with Honours or as a General
Course degree. A General Course degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations. Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com. 75
Students holding the degree of B.A. from this University may
proceed to the degree of B.Com. by completing 15 additional units
of work, provided that the additional units are chosen so as to
complete the requirements for the B.Com. degree..
. It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen so as to
cover the requirements for both degrees.
No distinction is made between General Course and Honour
students in the First and Second Years; but a student will not
be accepted as a candidate for Honours in the Third Year unless
he has obtained an average of second class on the courses required
to be taken in the Second Year.
While the B.A. degree may be completed in one year by students
holding the B.Com. degree, the converse is hot true, as work in
two consecutive years is required for the B.Com. degree in both
Accountancy and Commercial Law. It is, however, possible for
students who are taking the combined degree in five years to
qualify for the B.A. degree at the end of four years by taking
additional courses either in Winter or Summer Session to make
up for the six units of Accountancy and Commercial Law 1 which
do not count towards the B.A. degree.   '4mmw
The regulations as to Summer Session credits, number of units
to be taken in any academic year, etc., apply to courses leading
to the degree of B.Com. in the same way as to courses leading to
the degree of B.A.
During the summer vacations students are advised to obtain
as much business experience as possible.
J First Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 1. ▼
The first course in a language offered for matriculation (Latin
or French or German or Greek).
Mathematics 1.
Economics 1.
One course selected from the following: Biology 1 (a), Chemistry 1, Physics 1, or Physics 2.
Second Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 2.
A continuation course in the language taken in the First Year.
Mathematics 2 or 3.
Economics 2.
Economics 10. 76 Faculty of Arts and Science
A clear academic record at the end of the Second Year will be
required of students proceeding to the Third Year.
In view of the importance which rightly attaches to the capacity
for adequate and clear expression in writing, regulation 13, on page
88 of the Calendar, will be rigidly enforced at the end of the
Second Year, and reasonable legibility in handwriting will be
insisted on.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised, to submit to
the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31 of each year, a
scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last two
years.
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years comprise 30
units, of which students must take, in their Third Year, not less
than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined by the
results of the Third and Fourth Years combined. Courses must
be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow.
Each student must take:
(a) An additional course in a language already taken for
credit in the first two years, that is French, German or
Latin (to be taken in the Third Year) or an additional
course in English. 3 units.
(b) The following seven courses:
Economics 4.    (Money and Banking.)
Economics 6.    (Foreign Trade.)
Economics 17.    (Commercial Law 1.)
Economics 18.     (Commercial Law 2.)
Economics 14.     (Accountancy!.)
Economics 12.    (Statistics 1.)
Economics 15 or 16.  (Accountancy 2 or 3.)    21 units.
(c) One of the following courses:
Economics 19.     (Marketing.)
Economies 13.    (Statistics 2.)
Economics 11.    (Transportation.) 3 units.
(d) One course — not already chosen — selected from the
following:
Economics 15 or 16.   (Accountancy 2 or 3.)
Economics 13.    (Statistics 2.)
Economics 11 (Transportation).
Government 1. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 77
Government 4.
Economics 5 (Taxation).
Mathematics 2 or 3.
Education (3 units).
English, if not chosen under (a), (3 units).
Additional course in Latin, French or German.
Geology (3 units).
Forestry (3 units).
Mining (3 units).
Agricultural Economics 1.
Biology (3 units). 3 units.
In the Fourth Year satisfactory work must be done in connection with a discussion class of one hour a week.
HONOURS
1. Candidates for Honours are required to take Statistics 2
and to present a graduating essay embodying the results of some
investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the
graduating essay will be 3 units. These requirements take the
place of the options offered to General Course students under (c)
and (d) above.
2. Candidates for Honours are required at the end of their
Fourth Year to take a general examination, oral or written or
both. This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge
of his chosen subject as a whole and is in addition to the ordinary
class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
3. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class.
First Class Honours will not be given unless the Graduating Essay
is First Class nor will Second Class Honours be given unless the
Graduating Essay is at least Second Class. Students who, in the
opinion of the department, have not attained a sufficiently high
ranking for Honours may be awarded a General Course degree.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree
from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application, on or before September 1, an official statement of his
graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in
the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine
the standing of such a student in this University.    The fee for 78 Faculty of Arts and Science
examination of certificates is $2.00.   This fee must accompany the
application.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who
proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(i) To do two or more years of private work under the
supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or
(ii) To do one year of private work under University
supervision and one term of resident graduate study,
the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of
resident graduate study.
4. A major, including a thesis, and a minor shall be required.
In general the minor shall be taken outside the Department in
which the student is taking his major, but special permission may
be given to take both major and minor in the same Department,
provided the subjects are different and are under different professors. The major or the minor may, with the consent of the
Department or the Departments concerned, be extended to include
work in an allied subject.
Candidates must have their courses approved by the Heads of
the Departments concerned, by the Committee on Graduate Studies,
and by the Dean. Special forms of "Application for a Course
Leading to the Master's Degree" may be obtained from the Registrar's office.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standardized thesis
paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of "Instructions
for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar on or before October 1.
7. The following minimum requirements apply to all Departments. For the details of the special requirements of the various
Departments see pages 79-83.
Prerequisites:
For a minor at least six units and for a major at least eight
units of courses regularly offered in the Third and Fourth Years.
A standing of at least Second Class must have been obtained
in each course.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above
during their undergraduate course may fulfil them by devoting
more than one academic year's study to the M.A. work. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 79-
M.A. Courses:
For a minor five or six units and for a major nine or ten units
of courses regularly offered in the Third and Fourth Years, or of
Graduate courses or of equivalents in reading courses.
The thesis shall count from three to six units.
A total of at least fifteen units is required with at least Second
Class standing in the work of the major and in the work of the
minor.
There shall be a general examination on the major field.
Examinations may be written or oral or both.
Languages: No candidate will receive the degree of M.A. who
has not satisfied the Head of the Department in which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in French or in
German.
8. Philosophy 7 and 9 will be accepted as prerequisites for a
minor in Education, if these subjects have not already been counted
as prerequisites towards a major or a minor in Philosophy.
Graduate students, who are Assistants, giving not more than
four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted to qualify
for the M.A. degree after one regular winter session of University
attendance, provided they have done, in the summer vacation,
research work of a nature and extent satisfactory to the Head of
the Department concerned. Such students must be registered as
graduate students and must have secured the approval of the
Head of the Department concerned and of the Faculty before
entering upon the research in question. Other graduate students
doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration as M.A.
students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by different
departments:
Bacteriology
Prerequisites:
Minor:  Bacteriology 1, 2, 3, and 6.
Major:  Bacteriology 1, 2, 5, and Bacteriology 3 or 6.
M.A. Course:
Minor:   A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with
the Department.
Major:  Thesis, five or six units, and other courses to complete
the required units. 80 Faculty of Arts and Science
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:   Biology 1 (a), and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:   Biology 1 (a), Botany 1, and eight additional units,
including Zoology 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:   A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with
the Department.
Major •.  Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete
the required units.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:   Biology 1 (a), and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:   Biology 1  (a), Zoology 1, and eight additional units,
including Botany 1.
M.A. Course: ^^a*
Minor: A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with
the Department.
Major: Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete the required number of units.
Economics
Prerequisites:
Minor: A minimum of fifteen units of work in subjects in
the Department, or an equivalent. The fifteen units
must include Economics 4, Economies 9, and Statistics
1.
Major: Honours in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites:
Minor:   A minimum of fifteen units in the Department (or an
equivalent), including Government 1 and Statistics 1.
Major:   Honours in Economics and Political Science;  or in
Economics; or in Economics in combination with some
other subject; or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department must
attend the Honour Seminar. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 81
English
Prerequisites:
Minor: At least nine units of credit for English courses
elective in the Third and Fourth years of the undergraduate curriculum.
Major: At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective in
the Third and Fourth years.
M.A. Course-
Minor:   Six units of credit in advanced courses in English not
already taken.
Major: (a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses not
already taken, one of which courses must be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has not been
previously offered for credit.
(6) A graduating essay which will count as an advanced course involving three units of credit.
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English
Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or German.
A student who offers both languages will be
allowed three units of credit towards the M.A.
degree.
French
Detailed Study:
(a) O.F.—Aucassin et Nicolette.
(b) XVIth Century—Authors: Rabelais, Ronsard and Montaigne [see under French 5(b)].
Less Detailed:
(c) XVIIth Century and after—The evolution of the French
Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le Breton's
Roman au XVIIe siecle, and the chief Romantic Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville.
Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le Neveu
de Rwmeau.   Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La Poesie au 19e siecle, Oxford.
Alfred de Musset, Theatre. Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano de
Bergerac, Fasquelle.
(/) A general knowledge of French literary history from
XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be detailed,
but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the
Head of the Department. 82 Faculty of Arts and Science
Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read and
will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of Corneille,
three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet, Chateaubriand,
La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac, Flaubert, Anatole
France.
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts, and
advice in reading; but the Department cannot undertake to cover
the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus.
History
Prerequisites:
Minor:   Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive.
Major:   Four courses (twelve units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive.
M.A. Course:
Minor: Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 10
to 20 inclusive, or the equivalent in Reading Courses.
Major: Two related courses (six units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive, or the equivalent in Reading Courses, and a thesis embodying original work to
which 3 units of credit are given. All candidates for
a major in History who have not already done so
must attend the Honours Seminar in Historical
Method, or submit to an examination on a parallel
Reading Course 'approved by the Department.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:   t
Minor:   Mathematics   10   and   at   least   two   other   Honour
Courses.
Major:   Candidates must have completed the Honour Course
in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
M.A. Course-
Minor:   Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to be
chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major:  Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Physics
Prerequisites:
Minor:   Physics 3 and 5 and at least two more units of work
regularly offered in the Third or Fourth Year.
Major:   At least eight units of work regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth Years. Teacher Training Course 83
M.A. Course:
Minor:   Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics not
already taken.
Major:   (a) At least six units of work in the graduate courses.
(b) A thesis.
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Candidates qualifying for the "Academic Certificate" (given
by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria, on the completion of the Teacher Training Course) take the courses prescribed
on page HI. These courses are open only to graduates registered
in the Teacher Training Course.
1. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science from
a recognized university must be submitted to the Registrar by all
candidates other than graduates of the University of British
Columbia. All correspondence in connection with the Teacher
Training Course should be addressed to the Registrar, from whom
registration cards may be procured.
2. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session successful candidates in
the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the Faculty
of Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education and
to the Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80
per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the
University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in
the various faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of the
University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of (1) History
and Principles of Education, and (2) Educational Psychology is
accepted as equivalent to a minor for an M.A. degree, subject
in each case to the consent of the Head of the Department in which
the student wishes to take his major.
3.   Preparatory Courses
Candidates will not be admitted to courses in High School
Methods unless they have obtained at least nine (9) units of credit
in each of the corresponding subjects from the academic courses 84 Faculty of Arts and Science
normally offered in the Third and Fourth Years. Special cases
will be decided on their merits. (The academic courses referred
to above are English, History, Mathematics, etc., and not courses
in Education.) Candidates offering History may substitute six
units of Economics for three units of History, subject to the approval
of their courses by the Heads of the Departments of History and
Economics.
Students planning to enter the Teacher Training Course
through Agriculture must have obtained at least nine (9) units
of credit in Agriculture in addition to Agriculture 1 and 2, and
at least nine (9) units of credit in any one of the following subjects: Chemistry, Physics or Biology (including Botany and
Zoology) in addition to Chemistry 1, Physics 1 or 2, and Biology
1. (a).
In addition to the above, prospective candidates for the Teacher
Training Course are required to select undergraduate courses in
such a way that, in addition to English 1 and 2, they will have
obtained either six units of credit in one, or three units of credit
in each of two of the following: English, Mathematics, Matriculation Language, Social Sciences (History, Economics, Political
Science, and Sociology).
Students who intend to proceed to the Teacher Training Course
are required to take Philosophy 1 (a) as prerequisite to Educational Psychology, a
A description of the courses offered is given under Department
of Education. I
COURSE LEADING TO THE SOCIAL
SERVICE DIPLOMA
The Diploma in Social Service will be granted on the completion of courses amounting to 45 units chosen in conformity with
the following outline:
First Year:
Biology 1 (a) (Introductory Biology) 3 units
Economics 1 (General Economics) 3 units
English 1 (Literature and Composition) 3 units
Mathematics 1  (Introductory Mathematics) 3 units
The first course in a language offered for matriculation
(Latin or French or German or Greek) 3 units Social Service
85
Second Year:
Philosophy 1 (a) (Elementary Psychology)
Sociology 1 (Introduction to Sociology)
Nursing 27 (The Family)
Social Service 1
Social Service 2
Social Service 3
Social Service 4
Social Service 9
(Introductory and Historical)
(Case Work)
(Child Welfare)
(Hygiene)
(Field Work Seminar)
Social Service 12 (Social Legislation)
units
units
unit
units
units
unit
unit
unit
unit
3 units
Social Service 6
Social Service 7
Social Service 8
Social Service 10
Social Service 11
Social Service 13
3 units
1 unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
units
unit
unit
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
Third Year:
Philosophy 9 (Child Psychology)
Economics 3 (Labour Problems) or
Sociology 3 (Urban Community) a
Nursing B 5 (Mental Hygiene)
Social Service    5  (Advanced Case Work)
(Advanced Child Welfare)
(Group Work)
(Public Health)
(Field Work Seminar)
(Administration)
(Public Welfare Seminar)
Students registered in the Combined Course in Nursing who
have completed the third and fourth year of professional work will
be granted the Social Service Diploma in one Winter Session and
the succeeding Summer Session on the completion of the following
courses:
Social Service 1 to 13 inclusive 17 units
Mature persons with some experience in social work may (subject to the approval of the Department of Economics) take individual courses as Partial students, but are not eligible for. the
Diploma unless they have satisfied matriculation requirements.
A minimum of eight hours' field work each week for four terms
is required. A student must, in addition, spend two months with
an accredited social agency as a full-time worker under supervision
prior to registration for the technical courses of the second year.
The agency is not responsible for expenses (such as carfare) incident to the field work.
Graduates in Arts and Science, who have some experience in
social work, and who have taken as part of their undergraduate
courses a sufficient number of the subjects required for the Diploma
in Social Service to enable them to devote additional time to field
work> may be allowed to obtain the Diploma in one Winter Session
and the succeeding Summer Session. 86 Faculty of Arts and Science
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are
held in April. In the case of subjects which are final at Christmas
and in the case of courses of the First and Second years, examinations will be held in December as well. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of
the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for
absence from examinations, a medieal certificate must be presented
on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the Dean's
office.
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject, except
in the case of First and Second Year students who, during one
session, do 15 units of regular work, in which case a percentage
of 50 or more will be required in each subject or a general average
of 60 per cent, and not less than 40 per cent, in each subject. In
Beginners' German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent.
In any course which involves both laboratory work and written
examinations, students may be debarred from examinations if they
fail to present satisfactory results in laboratory work, and they will
be required to pass in both parts of the course.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class,
an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.;
Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. A student who makes 50 per cent, of the total required for
a full year's work (at least 15 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations), but who fails in an individual subject will
be granted a supplemental examination in that subject if he has
not fallen below 30 per cent, in that subject. If his mark is below
30 per cent, a supplemental examination will not be granted.
Notice will be sent to all students to whom supplemental examinations have been granted.
A student who makes less than 50 per cent, of the total required
for a full year's work (15 units) will not be allowed a supplemental
examination.
5. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must be
forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after the
results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant must
state clearly his reasons for making such a request in view of the
fact that the paper of a candidate who makes less than a passing
mark in a subject is read at least a second time before results are
tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination paper
will be granted only with the consent of the Head of the Department concerned.  The fee for re-reading a paper is $2.00. Examinations and Advancement 87
6. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September in
respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or July
in respect of Summer Session examinations. In the Teacher Training Course, Supplemental Examinations will be held not earlier
than the third week in June. To pass a supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at least 50 per cent.
In the first three years a candidate who has been granted a
supplemental may try the supplemental only once. If he fails
in the supplemental, he must either repeat his attendance in the
course or substitute an alternative chosen in accordance with
Calendar regulations. In the case of Fourth Year students two
supplemental examinations in respect of the same course will be
allowed.
A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding in
any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may clear
his record by attending the Summer Session course in the subject
and passing the required examinations.
7. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by
the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees), must be in the hands
of the Registrar by August 15.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing defective
in respect of more than 3 units. (See regulations in regard to
advancement to Third Year Commerce, page 76, and in reference
to admission to Second Year Applied Science, page 66.
No student who has failures or supplementals outstanding in
more than 3 units, or who has any failure or supplemental outstanding for more than a year of registered attendance, shall be
allowed to register for more than 15 units of work, these units to
include either the subject (or subjects) in which he is conditioned
or permissible substitutes. But a student in the Fourth Year will
be permitted to register for 15 units of work in the Fourth Year,
even though he may have failures or supplementals outstanding
against him, providing that these failures or supplementals do not
carry more than three units of credit and that they do not involve
the repitition of a course. Such a student shall not be permitted to
complete his examinations until September.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in
which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an
earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the
Second Year.
10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of
that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year
will be exempt from attending lectures and passing examinations
in subjects in which he has already made at least 50 per cent.   In 88 Faculty of Arts and Science
this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which
he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year.
11. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may,
upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the
Senate to withdraw from the University.
12. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the
tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second
Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation
of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance
at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student
will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplementary examinations are outstanding.
13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English; and, in
this event, students will be required to pass a special examination
in English to be set by the Department of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology and Preventive Medicine
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill. (On leave of absence.)
Associate Professor: C. E. Dolman.
Assistant Professor:   D. C. B. Duff.
Instructor:   Helen M. Mathews.
1. General Bacteriology. — A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature,
the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and isolation and various bactericidal substances and conditions will be
studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household
science, and public health will be carefully considered.
Text-book:  Lutman, Microbiology, McGraw-Hill, latest edition.
Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Park,
Williams & Krumweide only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 1, and Biology 1 (a).
Seven hours a week.  First Term. 2 units.
2. Special Bacteriology. — A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together
with the reactions of the animal body against invasion by these
bacteria. The course will include demonstrations in immunity and
the various diagnostic methods in use in public health laboratories.
Text-book: Park, Williams & Krumwiede, Pathogenic Microorganisms, Lea & Febiger, latest edition. Botany 89
Prerequisite:  Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week.  Second Term. 2 units.
3. As in Dairying 3  (under Faculty of Agriculture).
iy2 units.
4. As in Dairying B (under Faculty of Agriculture).
iy2 units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology.—A reading and laboratory course,
including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour per week;
laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged with the class.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2, with at least second class
standing in Bacteriology 2. 3 units.
Reference works: Topley & Wilson, Principles of Bacteriology
and Immunity, Wm. Wood & Co., latest edition. Topley, Outline
of Immunity, Edward Arnold & Co., 1933 edition. Current Bacteriological Journals.
6. Soil Bacteriology.—A laboratory and lecture course* in which
the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively,
with special reference to soil fertility.
Text-book:    Lohnis   and   Fred,    Text-book   of   Agricultural
Bacteriology, McGraw-Hill, latest edition.
Prerequisite:  Bacteriology 1.
Six hours a1 week. First Term. 2 units.
7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture).     3 units.
. 8. Reading Course in Bacteriology—A directed reading course
in advanced bacteriology or immunity. Written or oral examination to be given at the discretion of the department.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5. (The course in certain
cases may run concurrently with Bacteriology 5.) 3 units.
Department of Botany
Professor:   A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor:   Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor:   John Davidson.
Instructor: E. Miriam R. Ashton.
Assistant:  Edgar Black.
Assistant:  Bertram B, Hillary.
Assistant: Jack M. Bickerton.
Assistant: Charlotte Dill.
Assistant: Wilfred Jack.
Biology
1. (a) Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely
related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry,
Medicine. 90 Faculty of Arts and Science
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationship
of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of
labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and Zoology.
A list of Reference Books is supplied.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
1. (b) General Biology. — A course designed to supplement
Biology 1 (a) and to give a general background for teachers of
High School Biology and Health. An introduction to the study
of the morphology, histology, physiology and ecology of plants and
animals.
A list of Reference Books is supplied.
Prerequisite:  Biology 1 (a).
Two lectures and two laboratory hours a week. 3 units.
2. (a) Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics
illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and animals;
the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired
characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Text-book:   Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1 (a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week.   First Term.
\y2 units.
2. (b) Principles of Genetics.—A continuation of the studies
of genetic principles with suggested applications. A lecture and
laboratory course. The laboratory work will consist of problems,
examination of illustrative material and experiments with Droso-
phila.
Text-book: Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite:  Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
iy2 units.
2. (c) An introduction to genetical methods.
Prerequisite:  Biology 2 (a) and 2 (b).
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. 2 units.
2. (d) A review of advanced phases and the more recent developments in genetics.
Prerequisite:  Biology 2 (b).
Two hours a week.   First Term. 1 unit.
3. General Physiology.—A study of animal and plant life
processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth years having
prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department
should be consulted. Botany 91
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans, Green.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Reference
reading.    Second term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except
the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward Botany 1
may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1 (a). If
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Morphology.—A comparative study of plant structures. The
relationship of plant groups. Comparative life histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures,
from the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First Term.
(Not given in 1935-36.) 2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
3. (a) A course dealing with the fundamental life processes
in plants, such as nutrition, photosynthesis, absorption, permeability, respiration, transpiration and growth. This course is prerequisite for Botany 3 (b) and 3 (e).
Text-book: O. Raber, Principles of Plant Physiology, 1929,
Macmillan.
Prerequisite:  Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. (b) This course comprises a more advanced study of the
organic constituents of plants and the physiological changes occurring during plant growth.   (Same as Horticulture 41.)
Prerequisite:  Botany 3(a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week. First
Term. 2 units. 92 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. (c). An advanced course to supplement 3 (a) and designed
to train students of the plant sciences in an understanding of the
inter-relationship of plants and soils.   (Same as Horticulture 42.)
Prerequisite:   Botany 3 (a).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of
plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining,
mounting, drawing, reconstruction. Use of microscope, camera
lueida, photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books: Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant
Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology,
University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:  Botany 1.
Seven hours a week.    Second Term. 2 units.
5. Systematic Botany. ^ "
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification
of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants
of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and poisonous
plants.    Methods of control.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Texts: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University of
California; Thomson & Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds,
University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
iy2 units.
5. (6.) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on
the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution,
relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion
Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific
Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington; Davidson and
Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin; Trealease,
The Woody Plants, Urbana.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work a week. 2 units.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing
with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering
plants".   Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work.   Plant Botany 93
description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification
of species.    Systems of classification.   Nomenclature.
Prerequisites:   Botany 5 (a).
Texts: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley &
Sons; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage, Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
IV2 units.
6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of
the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites
of the forest.
Text-book:   Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week during one-half
of the Second Term. y2 unit.
6. (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary).—A course dealing with
basic concepts of plant disease and plant disease control. A number
of economically important plant diseases are studied in detail.
Text-book:   Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
2 units.
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced).—A course designed for
Honour or Graduate students. Technique, isolation and culture
work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the
progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures.
Prerequisite:  Botany 6 (c).
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology.—A course designed to give the student a
general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view.
Text-books:  Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Credit will be
given for a collection of fungi made during the summer preceding
the course.    First Term. 2 units.
6 (/) History of Plant Pathology.—A lecture course dealing
with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from ancient
times to the present.
Text-book: Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite:   Botany 6 (c).
One lecture a week.   Second Term. y2 unit.
7, Plant Ecology.
7 (o) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The interrelations of
forest trees and their environment; the ecological characteristics 94 Faculty of Arts and Science
of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions;
physiography.
Reference books: Weaver and Clements, Plant Ecology, McGraw-Hill; Whitford and Craig, Forests of British Columbia,
Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World, McGraw-Hill;
Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press.
Prerequisite:  Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work a week.
First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A course in General Botany, comprising approximately fifty
lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life of the
Province. No entrance examination and no previous knowledge
of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters,
and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as possible,
illustrative material will be selected from the flora of British
Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University
session (September-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part of the
course.
No examination is required except in the case of University
students desiring credit for this course. Biology 1 is a prerequisite
in the case of students desiring credit for this course. This course
may be substituted for the lecture part of Botany; but credit is
not given until the laboratory work is complete.
Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in the class
may apply for a written test.
A detailed statement of requirements and of work covered in
this course is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had on
request.
Department of Chemistry
Professor:   R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry:  E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor:   W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor:  M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor:   William Ure.
Assistant:   Norman Phillips.
Assistant:   Munro McArthur.
Assistant:  Robert A. Finlay.
Assistant:  J. Gilbert Hooley.
Assistant:  J. Norton Wilson.
Assistant:   Harry Lotzkar.
1. General Chemistry.—The course comprises- a general survey
of the whole field of Chemistry and is designed on the one hand
to provide a thorough groundwork for further study in the sciences Chemistry 95
and on the other to give an insight into the methods of chemical
investigation, the fundamental theories and some important applications such as are suitable to the needs of a cultural education.
Students must reach the required standard in both lecture and
laboratory work.
Texts: Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929
Edition, the Century Co. For the laboratory: Harris and Ure,
Experimental Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.
Three lectures and two and one-half hours laboratory a week.
3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.-^-A study of the chemical reactions
of the common metallic and acid radicals, together with the theoretical considerations involved in these reactions.
Text:  A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Reference:    Miller,   The  Elementary   Theory  of  Qualitative
Analysis, The Century Co.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.    First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Willard and Furman, Quantitative Analysis, Van
Nostrand.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
^^ 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation and
a description of the more important groups of compounds in both
the aliphatic and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Books recommended: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic
Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman-Wielands, Laboratory Methods of
Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (o) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course in the
development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study
of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical
conductivity, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-
Hill.
Reference: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan. 96 Faculty of Arts and Science
For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical, Physical, Chemistry,
Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physical
Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in
Physics) and Mathematics 2. Honour students majoring in Chemistry should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with the
omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5 Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will include
the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks as well
as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which
analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
3 units.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be considered
in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by specialists
in their respective fields.
Prerequisites:   Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry,
chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan;
for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physico-
Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4. Mathematics 10, which
may be taken concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units. Chemistry 97
8. Electrochemistry.—(a) Solutions are studied from the standpoint of the osmotic and dissociation theories. The laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary and secondary
cells are considered in detail.
Texts: LeBlanc, Elements of Electrochemistry, Macmillan;
Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Vol. I, Wiley; All-
mand, Applied Electrochemistry, Longmans.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
\y2 units.
(b) As in Applied Science.
9 (a) Advanced Organic Chemistry.—The lectures will deal
with some of the more complex carbon compounds, such as the
carbohydrates and their stereochemical configurations, fats, proteins, ureides and purine derivatives and enzyme action.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
\y2 units.
9 (b) The terpenes and alkaloids will be considered. The more
complicated types of organic reaction and various theoretical conceptions will be presented. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon,
hydrogen, nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made.
Text:  Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
iy2 units.
10. History of Chemistry.—A general survey of the development of chemical knowledge from the earliest times up to the
present day, with particular emphasis on chemical theory.
References: Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill; Campbell-Brown, History of Chemistry, Blakiston's Son.
Two hours a week.    Second Term. 1 unit.
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories will
be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and chemical
and physico-chemical methods employed in determining the constitution of organic compounds will be studied. The electronic
conception of valency as applied to organic compounds will be
considered, and an outline of the work done in Electro-Organic
Chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 7 and 9.
One hour a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—A consideration of the principles which
underlie the behaviour of disperse systems and reactions at surfaces
including  electro - capillary phenomena,  preparation  of colloids, 98 Faculty of Arts and Science
Brownian movement, surface tension, adsorption, emulsions, membrane equilibria and gels.
References: Taylor, The Chemistry of Colloids, Arnold and
Co.; Svedberg, Colloid Chemistry, Chemical Catalog Co.; Freund-
lich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen.
Prerequisites:   Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week.   First Term. 1 unit.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Study of first, second and
third laws. Derivation of fundamental equations and application
gas laws, chemical equilibrium, theory of solutions, electro-chemistry and capillarity.
Text-book: Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics,
McGraw-Hill. Reference: Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 7.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed treatment of chemistry of the metals than is possible in Chemistry 1;
together with the Chemistry of the Rare Elements.
Prerequisites:   Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures a week.   Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
19. Biochemistry.—This course will deal with such topics as,
some special applications of colloid chemistry to Biology, the
determination of hydrogen-ion concentration, the chemical and
physical processes involved in the digestion, absorption and assimilation of foodstuffs in the animal body, the intermediate and ultimate products of metabolism, and nutrition.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 9 (a). Chemistry 9 (a) and
19 may, on permission, be taken conjointly.
Two lectures a week.    Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1936-37.)
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—This course
is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course
and does not carry undergraduate credit.
References: Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry, The Macmillan Company. Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall,
1929 Edition.    The Century Company.
Two lectures a week.    First Term.
21. Chemical Kinetics.—The applications of statistical mechanics to chemical problems, such as the rates of thermal and photochemical reactions, and the emission and absorption of radiation Classics 99
by molecules. The Quantum theory as applied to molecular processes and band spectra.
Reference: Tolman, Statistical Mechanics with Applications to
Physics and Chemistry.
Two lectures a week.    Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
Department of Classics
Professor:  Lemuel Robertson.
Professor:  O.J.Todd.
Professor:   H.T.Logan.
Greek ' ,
,.: A-—Homeric Greek, A Book for Beginners, Clyde Pharr, Heath,
lessons I-LIV.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and
Rome, Chap. I-XXXII.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad I, 304-611; Plato, Apology, Adam,
Pitt Press.
..... Cpmposition.—North and Hillard, Greek Prose Composition,
Rivingtons, the "A" exercises through 3lA. Selected passages
will occasionally be set for Unseen Translation.
Literature.—Norwood, The Writers of Greece.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan ; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge;
Euripides, Iphigenia at Aulis, Headlam, Cambridge.
'<.   Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2 Vols.,
Oxford; Greek Elegiac, Iambic, and Lyric Poets, Harvard; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac and Third Philippic, Butcher, Oxford
(Vol. I).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
6, Lectures.—Herodoti Historiae (selections), Hude, Oxford;
Lysiae Orationes XVI (selections), Shuckburgh, Macmillan; Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart, Oxford. (Open only to
those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.) 100 Faculty of Arts and Science
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, ^4rs Poetica, Bywater, Oxford; Plato,
The Republic (selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only to those
who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 unite.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be taken
in both Third and Fourth Years. 1 unit.
9. Greek History to Id A.D.—The course will begin with a
brief survey of contributory civilizations of pre-Hellenie times
and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek
world during the period.   Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Text-book:   M. L. W. Laistner, Greek History, Heath.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
Latin   ™
1. Lectures.—Cicero, De Senectute, Shuckburgh-Egbert, Macmillan ; Horace, Odes I and II, Page, Macmillan.
Composition.—Pilsbury, Latin Prose Composition, Clarendon
Press.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and
Rome, Dent, Chap. I to XXXII.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. (a) Lectures.—A Book of Latin Poetry, Macmillan; Cicero,
Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace, Odes III, Page, Macmillan.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and
Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. (b) Lectures.—Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace,
Odes III, Page, Macmillan.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece and
Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Composition.—Pilsbury, Latin Prose Composition, Clarendon
Press.
All students are expected to provide themselves with Allen and
Greenough New Latin Grammar.
Three hours a week. 3 units. Classics 101
2 (a) and 2 (b) are alternate courses; students intending to
read for Honours in the Third and Fourth Years are expected,
and students intending to offer Latin as a subject in the Education
course, are advised to take Latin 2 (6).
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Bond and Walpole, Macmillan; Virgil, Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories, I, II, Godley, Macmillan;
Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Avery, Latin Prose Literature (selections 34-40,
44, 50-51, 56, 59-66), Little, Brown & Co.; Juvenal, Satires, Duff,
Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures. — Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan;
Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (selections), Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D.
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heitland,
Cambridge; A Short History of the Roman Empire, Wells and
Barrow, Methuen.
A knowledge of Latin is not prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be taken
in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week; individual conferences at the pleasure of
the instructor. 1 unit.
9. Methods in High School Latin. Spring term only. This
course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course, and does not carry undergraduate credit. Readings to be
assigned.
Two hours a week. 102 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Economics, Political Science,
Commerce and Sociology
Professor:  H. F. Angus.
Professor:   W. A. Carrothers.   (On leave of absence.)
Associate Professor; J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor:  C. W. Topping.
Associate Professor:  G. F. Drummond.
Lecturer in Accountancy:   Frederick Field.
Lecturer in Commercial Law:   F. K. Collins.
Lecturer in Commercial Law:   Reginald H. Tupper.
Lecturer in Economics:   W. H. Taylor.
Assistant: Netta Harvey.
Assistant:   Cecil N. Brennan.
Honorary Lecturers:
J. Howard T. Falk, Part-time Lecturer (Social Service Course).
Laura Holland, O.B.E., Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons College), Part-
time Lecturer (Social Service Course).
Mary McPhedran, Diploma, Social Service Department (Toronto), Part-time
Lecturer (Social Service Course).
Edna Pearce, B.S. (Knox, Illinois), Supervisor of Field Work ((Social Service
Course).
Miss Zella Collins, Diploma, Social Service Department (Toronto), Part-time
Lecturer (Social Service Course).
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of general
economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value,
prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly,
taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and
trusts, etc.
Slichter, Modern Economic Society, Holt; Cole, Intelligent
Man's Guide Through World Chaos, Ryerson; The Canada Year
Book, 1934.
Additional readings will be assigned for students offering this
course for credit in the Third or Fourth Year.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in this
department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2,
with Sociology 1, or with Government 1.
Three hours a week. . 3 units.
2. Economic History. — A survey of the factors of economic
significance from earliest recorded times, leading to consideration
of the more important phases of European organisation, with
special reference to the Industrial Revolution, the progress of
agriculture, and resultant social conditions. Economics 103
Southgate, English Economic History, Dent; Toynbee, Industrial Revolution, Longmans; Knowles, Industrial and Commercial
Revolutions, Dutton; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise
of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the more
important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada and the
United States. A critical analysis of various solutions of the labour
problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing, co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation
and socialism.
Patterson, Social Aspects of Industry, McGraw-Hill; and assigned readings.   Beveridge, Unemployment, Longmans.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
4. Money and Banking. — The origin and development of
money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage, credit,
price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in the leading
countries, with particular reference to Canada.
Text: Rufener, Money and Banking in the United States,
Houghton Mifflin.
Readings: G. D. H. Cole, What Everybody Wants to Know
About Money, London, Gollanez, 1933; L. D. Edie, Money, Bank
Credit and Prices, Harpers, New York, 1928; and Report of the
Royal Commission on Banking and Currency in Canada, Ottawa,
1933.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with the
principles and methods of taxation, and administration of public
funds. Topics examined include: Growth of taxation methods;
theories of justice in taxation, classification, increase, economic
effects and control of expenditures; property, business, personal,
commodity and inheritance taxes, with reference to Canada,
Britain and other countries; the single tax; double taxation;
shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation; flotation,
administration, conversion and redemption of government loans.
Text: To be assigned. H. L. Lutz, Public Finance.
Readings: E. R. A. Seligman, Essays in Finance, 1925; H.
Dalton, Principles of Public Finance, 1929; A. Comstock, Taxation
in the Modern State, 1931.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.) 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the
theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; the balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental factors;
the problem of Reparations and of War Debts; the protective
tariff and commercial imperialism; the commercial policy of the
leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada.
Taussig, International Trade, Macmillan; Griffin, Principles of
Foreign Trade, Macmillan; Taussig, Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems, Ginn; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
7. Corporation Economics. — Historical development of the
different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint stock company and the corporation, and the later
developments, such as the pool, trust, combination and holding
company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization,
stock market activities, the public policy toward corporations, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
9. History of Economic Thought.—A study of the development
of modern economic theory, with special reference to the Mercantilists; the Physiocrats; Adam Smith; the Classical School and
its critics; the Historical School; Jevons and Austrian School;
Marshall; together with a study of recent trends in economic
thought.
Text: W. A. Scott, The Development of Economics, New York,
Century Co., 1933.
Readings: C. Gide & C. Rist, A History of Economic Doctrines,
New York, D. C. Heath & Co., n.d.; A. Gray, The Development of
Economic Doctrine, London, Longmans, Green & Co., 1931; T.
Veblen, The Place of Science in Modern Civilization, New York,
Viking Press, 1930.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(This may be made a Reading Course in 1935-36.)
10. Economic Geography (formerly Geography 5).—A general
survey of the principal resources and industries of the world, with
emphasis on those entering into international trade, leading to a
study of the principles and problems of transportation by sea.
MacFarlane, Economic Geography, latest edition, Pitman; Chisholm, Handbook of Commercial Geography, Longmans & Co.; and
assigned readings.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Day. 3 units. Economics 105
11. Transportation. — A comprehensive study of the fundamentals of railroad development and organization, with the legal
and economic problems involved; theory and practice of rate-
making; discriminations; factors in public control, etc.
Acworth, Elements of Railway Economics, Clarendon Press,
Oxford; Jackman, Economics of Transportation, University of
Toronto Press; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
12. Statistics 1. — Statistical methods in relation to economic
and social investigations. Statistical groups; types of average.
Statistical series in time; trend and fluctuation. Index numbers.
Methods of measuring correlation. Elementary probabilities and
the normal curve of error: Problem of sampling.
Mills, F. C, Statistical Methods; Mills, F. O, and Davenport,
D. H., A Manual of Problems and Tables in Statistics, Henry Holt
and Company.
Prerequisite:  Mathematics 2 or 3.
One lecture and two hours laboratory work a week. Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
13. Statistics 2.—This course is a continuation of Statistics 1,
and aims at giving an understanding of statistical technique in
its application to problems of business and economic research.
It involves a study of more advanced methods of correlation
analysis, cyclical fluctuations and business forecasting. In addition
to covering a wide course of reading, students will be required to
construct tables, diagrams, etc., based on original data (official
or private) of the statistics of trade, production, sales, prices,
wages, etc., and to write reports and precis.
Texts: Ezekiel, Methods of Correlation Analysis, John Wiley
& Sons; Riggleman and Frisbee, Business Statistics, McGraw-Hill;
Haney, Business Forecasting, Ginn & Co.; Persons, The Problem,
of Business Forecasting, Houghton Mifflin; Warren-Pearson, Prices,
Wiley.
Brown, Bingham and Temnomeroff, Laboratory Hand Book of
Statistical Methods, McGraw-Hill.
Mills, Economic Tendencies in the United States, National
Bureau of Economic Research.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Drummond. 3 units. 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Degree
of B.Com.
14. Accountancy 1.—An introductory course to give a broad
perspective of accounting principles and methods, and to promote
an intelligent appreciation of business transactions in their relation
to the balance sheet and income account. Consideration is given
to single proprietorships and partnerships, with attention to the
basis of corporation organization from which the study of the final
year in accounting can be developed.
Kester, Accounting Theory and Practice, Vol. I, Ronald Press;
and assigned readings.
Prerequisites:   Economics 2, Economics 10, Mathematics 3.
Three hours a week. Mr. Day. • 3 units.
15. Accountancy 2.—More advanced work in connection with
the accounting and financial problems of corporations, including
consolidations; special reference to depreciation; and the miscellaneous details connected with balance sheet valuations in general.
Kester, Accounting Theory and Practice, Vol. II, Ronald Press;
and assigned readings.
Prerequisite:   Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Field. 3 units.
16. Accountancy 3.—A study of the principles involved in cost
accounting, including the practical working through a model set
of accounts and a consideration of the managerial use of cost
records. J
Prerequisite:  Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
17. Commercial Law 1.—The formation, operation, construction and discharge of contracts; bills and notes; agency; and company law. If time permits, consideration will be given to the
principles of bankruptcy law.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
18. Commercial Law 2.—Sale of goods; fraudulent conveyances; fraudulent preferences; bills of sale; assignment of book
accounts; bulk sales; partnership; trusts; certain principles in
the law of real property; mortgages, and landlord and tenant.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.) Economics 107
19. Marketing and Problems in Sales Management.—A detailed
study of marketing functions, leading up to the analysis of problems which have to be solved by sales executives.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as
applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural
problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural surplus,
production in relation to population growth, the farm income and
the share of Agriculture in the national income.
Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver, Nourse
and others.
Three lectures a week.   Mr. Clement. 3 units.
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to the
individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as
compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured
goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat, fruit
and milk in Canada.
Hibbard, Marketing Agricultural Products, Appleton; Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press,
Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Boyle,
Benton, Black, Patton and others.
Three lectures a week. Mr, Clement. 3 units.
Government
1. Constitutional Government. — This course deals with the
nature, origin and aims of the State; and with the organization of
government in the British Empire, the United States of America,
France and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey of
Legal History,   (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems. — A course on problems of government
within the British Empire.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.) 108 Faculty of Arts and Science
4. Problems of the Pacific.—A course on the problems of the
Pacific Area discussed at the Conference of the Institute of Pacific
Relations in 1933. Each problem will be related to its economic
and political background.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
Sociology
1. Introduction to Sociology.—The approach to the study of
society is by way of the local community and its institutions. An
evaluation of the importance of the geographic, the biological, the
psychological and the cultural factors in the determination of
the rise, growth and functioning of groups will be undertaken.
There will be an attempt to discover fundamental principles and
to trace these principles in their interrelationships. Several of the
problems resulting from group contacts will be studied.
Texts: Davis and Barnes, Introduction to Sociology, Heath;
Reuter and Hart, Principles of Sociology, McGraw-Hill.
The rule that Economics 1 must be taken prior to this course
or concurrently with it may be waived in the case of students in
Nursing.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Topping. 3 units.
2. Social Origins and Development. — The different views
relating to the origin and evolution of human society; the
geographic factor and economic methods in their bearing upon
social life; primitive mental attitudes; the development of ethical,
etc., ideas among primitive peoples; primitive institutions, tools,
art and their modern forms; the growth of cardinal social ideas
through the ancient and classical period to the present time.
Texts:   Lowie, Introduction to Cultural Anthropology, Farrar
and Rinehart, 1934; Wissler, The American Indian, Oxford, 1922.
Three hours a week. Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
3. The Urban Community.—The structural characteristics of
the modern city will be outlined and the sociological significance
of the functions performed by its inhabitants discussed. A factual
study will be made of urban personalities, groups and cultural
patterns. Methods of urban social control will be investigated and
solutions for urban problems will be evaluated.
Texts: Anderson, Lindeman, Urban Sociology, Knopf, 1928;
Carpenter, The Sociology of City Life, Longmans, 1931.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate .years.) Economics 109
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Diploma
of Social Service
Note: A student must be of the full age of Twenty-one years
for admission to any of these courses.
1. Introduction to Social Service.—An introductory course in
which is presented a general view of the entire field of social service
as illustrated by its present scope and methods.
Two hours a week. Mr. Topping. 2 units.
2. Social Organization and Case Work Methods.—An introductory course in which the general principles of the social
treatment of unadjusted individuals and disorganized families are
elucidated.
One hour a week.  Miss McPhedran. 1 unit.
3. Child Welfare.—An introductory course in which methods
of caring for dependent, neglected, and delinquent children are
presented and discussed.
One hour a week.  Miss Holland. 1 unit.
4. Personal Hygiene.—An introductory course in which basic
facts concerning physiological processes, infection, immunity and
the more common diseases, as related to the task of the social
worker, are presented.
One hour a week. Miss Kerr. 1 unit.
5. Case Work Methods.—Selected case records which present
complex or difficult situations are studied with a view to determining the principles of diagnosis and treatment involved.
One hour a week.  Miss McPhedran. 1 unit.
6. Child Welfare Case Studies. — An intensive study of the
records of a child welfare organization will be undertaken. Field
work to supplement the lectures is arranged for in a child welfare
agency.
One hour a week.  Miss Collins. 1 unit.
7. Group Work. — The principles underlying community organization and group organization are established by a study of
case records and through the working out of projects. Field work
is arranged to supplement the lectures and discussions.
One hour a week. Miss Pearce. 1 unit.
8. Public Health.—Such an understanding of the work of the
chief public and private health agencies will be given as will
encourage intelligent co-operation on the part of the social worker
with these agencies.
One hour a week. 1 unit. 110 Faculty of Arts and Science
9 and 10, Field Work Seminar. — The problems met by the
students in connection with field work are discussed, as well as
certain other selected problems. The object of the seminar is to
unify and integrate the whole course.
One hour a week. Mr. Topping, Miss Pearce.
1 unit each session.
11. Administration.—One hour a week.  Mr. Falk. 1 unit.
12. Social Legislation.—One hour a week. 1 unit.
13. Public Welfare Seminar.—One hour a week. 1 unit.
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.    (On leave of absence.)
Acting Head: Daniel Buchanan.
Associate Professor: Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Associate Professor: W. G. Black.
Special Lecturer: C. B. Wood.
Lecturers in High School Methods: The following professors:
R. H. Clark, A. C. Cooke, J. G. Davidson, Janet T. Greig,
A. H. Hutchinson, L. Richardson, L. Robertson, G. G. Sedgewick. •      ■
Notes
1. Education 2 and 3 are the same as 10 and 11. They are
open as undergraduate courses only to students who have completed their Normal Training.   ^ ^
2. Philosophy 7 and 9 may be counted as courses in Education.
3. Undergraduates who intend to proceed to the Teacher Training Course are required to take Philosophy 1 (a) and are advised
to select at least one of the following: Education 1, Philosophy
1(6), 7, 9.
4. Registration for the Teacher Training Course is limited to
sixty (60). Applications for admission, accompanied by the registration and Library fee, should be made to the Registrar on or
before August 31.
Undergraduate Courses
1. Introduction to the Study of Education. — This course is
intended to serve as a broad survey of current educational theory
and practice. The following topics will be studied: The needs of
society and of the individual; general and specific objectives of
education j educative agencies; the school system; school law; school
finance; the pupil; the teacher; the curriculum; the educative
process; current tendencies in education; the development of the
science of education. Education 111
Text-book: Burton, Introduction to the Study of Education,
Appleton-Century Co. 3 units.
2. Educational Psychology.   (See Education 10.) 3 units.
3. History and Principles of Education.  (See Education 11.)
3 units.
Teacher Training Courses
10. Educational Psychology.
Text to be announced.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1 (a).
11. History and Principles of Education.
(a) A study of educational leaders and movements and of
school practices, with special attention to the period
since 1800.
(6) Modern  educational  systems:   Canada,  with  special
reference to British Columbia; England; France; Germany ; the United States. '
Text-books: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Kandel, Comparative Education, Houghton Mifflin.
12. School Administration and Law.
Texts: Douglass, Organization and Administration of Secondary
Schools, Ginn & Co. (Selected Chapters); School Law of British
Columbia; Report of the School Survey Commission of British
Columbia; Koos, The Junior High School, Ginn & Co.
A list of references will be provided at the opening of the
Session.
13. Tests and Measurements.
14. Methods, Observation and Practice.
(a) Principles of Methods.
(b) Elementary School Subjects.  First Term.
(c) High School Subjects. — English, History, Latin,
French, Mathematics, Biology, Chemistry, Physics,
Art, Physical Education, Agriculture.
Two hours a week in each course.  Second Term.
Two courses are required under (c), but students are
advised to attend a third course.
(d) Observation and Practice.
(1) First Term:   At least, forty   (40)   hours in the
elementary schools of the Province.
(2) Second Term:   At least sixty (60) hours in the
high schools of the Province. 112 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Professor:  W. L. MacDonald.
Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
Associate Professor:  Ira Dilworth.
Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert.
Assistant Professor: H. C. Lewis.
Instructor: Dorothy Blakey.
Assistant: Geoffrey Riddehough.
First Year
1. (a) Literature.—Elementary study of a number of literary
forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the novel, the
essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1935-36: Larsen & Macdonald, A Century of Short
Stories, Macmillan. Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shakspere, Julius Caesar. Sheridan, The School for
Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, A Doll's House, Everyman. Monro,
Twentieth Century Poetry, Chatto and Windus.
Two hours a week.
(b) Composition.—Elementary forms and principles of composition.
Text: Foerster & Steadman, Writing and Thinking, Houghton
Mifflin.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class
exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be
required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of
the work.
Second Year
2. Literature.—Studies in the history of English Literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Reynolds, English
Literature in Fact and Story, The Century Co.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
9. Shakspere.—This course may be taken for credit  in two
successive years.   In 1935-36, 9 (a) will be given as follows:
i. A detailed study of the text of Romeo and Juliet, Twelfth
Night, Hamlet, King Lear, Coriolanus.
ii. Lectures  on   Shakspere's  development,  on  his use of
sources, and on his relation to the stage and the dramatic
practice of his time. English 113
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of the
five plays named above, and with The Facts About Shakespeare,
by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised to get the
Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford Shakespeare,
ed. Craig.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
9. (b)   (Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of the
Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of Tragedy.
The main subject of the course is Elizabethan Drama: (1) its
beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in the
Interludes; (2) its development in Shakspere's predecessors—
Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in
Shakspere; (4) and its decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher,
Middleton, Webster, Massinger, Shirley and Ford.
Texts: Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse, World's
Classics, Oxford; Everyman and Other Interludes, Dent; Chief
Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin; Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the present Time.—
The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson,
Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe,
Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray, and George
Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, Hardy and a few representative novelists now living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott, Dickens,
Thackeray and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those taking this
course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to give
a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents of
English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800. It is
mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope,
Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780-1830. — Studies in the beginnings
and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott.
Text:   Bernbaum, Guide Through the Romantic Movement. 114 Faculty of Arts and Science
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1780-
1830.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Dilworth. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with
the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks at the
close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the development
of later poetry.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge
Edition; Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition; Tennyson, Poems, Globe
Edition; Pierce, Century Readings in the Nineteenth Century
Poets, The Century Co.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1830-
1880.
Three hours a week..   Mr. Dilworth. 3 units.
19. Contemporary Literature. — Some tendencies of English
Literature of the present generation, in poetry and the essay and
the novel, will be studied in this course.
Texts: Brown, Essays of Our Times, Scott, Foresman Company; Sanders and Nelson, Chief Modern Poets, Macmillan
Company.   Three novels, to be assigned.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Lewis.       t 3 units.
25. (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates for an
Honours degree in English may elect a course of private reading
in their Third Year. 3 units.
25. (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Fourth Year may
pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the Department, a course of private reading. 3 units.
' In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction
will be given.
20. Chaucer and Middle English.—(a) Middle English grammar with the reading of representative texts, (b) The Canterbury
Tales.
Texts: A Middle English reader; Chaucer, The Cambridge
Poets, ed. Robinson, Houghton Mifflin; Manly, The Canterbury
Tales, Holt.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
21. (a) Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old
English, George Wahr; Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Holt.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
21. (6) Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Dilworth. 1 unit. Geology 115
22. Studies in Linguistic History.—Origins, growth, and development of the English language. A brief introduction to Germanic
philology; the Indo-European language group; Grimm's Law; the
Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and Latin influences; study
ef the gradual evolution of forms, sounds and meanings.
Two hours a week.   First Term.   Mr. Dilworth. 1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice
in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation. The
subject for 1935-36 will be announced at the beginning of the
session.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units.
Teacher Training Course
26. Methods in High School English. — This course does not
carry undergraduate credit.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Sedgewick.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor:   R. W. Brock.   (On leave of absence.)
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaentology and Stratigraphy:  M. V. Williams.
Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrography: H. V. Warren.
Assistant:  Roy Graham.
Assistant:  Gordon Davis.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to
the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the
lectures and laboratory.
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work of the
wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its work,
the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes, and igneous
intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus and ore
deposits.
Two lectures a week. First Term. Mr. Williams.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, include the
study and identification of the most common minerals and rocks,
the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the
study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Schofield, Mr. Warren and
Mr. Williams.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quaternary
eras.
Two lectures a week.  Second Term.  Mr. Williams. 116 Faculty of Arts and Science
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consist of
the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations,
their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence
in the strata.
Two hours laboratory a week.  Second Term. Mr. Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take
the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood
of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Longwell, Knopf, Flint and Schuchert, Outlines of
Physical and Historical Geology.   Wiley.
Students will be required to make passing marks both in the
combined written and the combined practical divisions of the
course. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy. — A brief survey of the field of
Mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1)
Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with special
reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal
forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief
outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy
and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. Physics 1 or 2 should precede or
accompany this course.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First Term.
Mr. Warren. \y2 units.
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This
course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite:   Geology 2 (a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second Term.
Mr. Warren. IV2 units. Geology 117
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology. — The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms, with special reference to the physiography of
British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite:  Geology 1.
Three hours a week.  Mr. Schofield. 3 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study of the
earth and the development of the geological sciences.   Mr. Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influence upon life.  Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite:  Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory a week. 3 units.
6. Palaeontology. — A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution, both
geological and geographical.
Reference books:  Grabau and Shimer, North American Index
Fossils; Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite:   Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Williams.
3 units.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of (i)
optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to
petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks, first
under the microscope and then in hand specimen.
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge
University Press; Johannsen, Essentials .for the Microscopical
Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University of
Chicago Press; Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisites:  Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours a week.
Mr. Warren. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and
structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore deposits 118 Faculty of Arts and Science
of the British Empire, special stress being placed on those in
Canada.
Text-book:  Ries, Economic Geology (6th edition), Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1 and 2. Geology 7 must precede or
accompany this course.
Four hours a week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Warren. 4 units.
9. Mineralography. — Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in cutting, grinding and polishing
of ore specimens, accompanied by training in microchemical
methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite of ores
from some mining district for a critical examination and report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of
the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. M
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this
course.
Two hours laboratory a week.  Mr. Warren. 1 unit.
12. Meteorology and Climatology. — A course covering in a
general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments,
constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours a week.
Second Term.  Mr. Schofield. \y2 units.
Courses for Graduate Students
(To be arranged in consultation with the Instructors and the
Head of the Department.)
Geology 20.—Sedimentation.
Text-book: Twenhofel, Treatise on Sedimentation, Williams
and Wilkins, Second Edition.
Prerequisites: Geology 1, 2, and 5.
One lecture or seminar and 6 hours of reading or laboratory
per week.   Mr. Williams. 3 units.
Geology 21.—Problems in Palaeontology.
Prerequisite:  Geology 6.
One seminar and 6 hours laboratory per week.   Mr. Williams.
3t5 units.
Geology 22.—Physiography.—General principles of Physiography, illustrated by examples from British Columbia.
Reference:  Davis, Geographical Essays, Ginn & Co.
Two lectures and one seminar per week. Mr. Schofield.  3 units. Geology 119
Geology 23.—Advanced Mineralogy.—A systematic study of
some of the rarer minerals, the determination of some of the more
important gem stones, together with an elementary study of crystal
measurements.
Text-books: Dana, Text Book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley; Brush and Penfield, Determinative Mineralogy and Blow
Pipe Analysis, Wiley.
Prerequisites:  Geology 2, 7, and 8.
One lecture or seminar and four or six hours laboratory work
per week. Mr. Warren. 3 or 4 units, dependent on amount of
laboratory work.
Geography
1. Principles of Geography.—This introductory course aims to
develop in the student the point of view of modern geography and
to furnish a foundation or background that will be useful not alone
to those who may intend to continue a study of geography or to
teach it in the schools but also to those who intend to study history,
economics and other subjects, or to enter business or professional
careers, into which geographical considerations enter.
Since geography is a study of the surface of the earth and its
relation to life, particularly to human life, physical geography
(fairly well covered by the prescribed text-book) must be mastered.
The second fundamental is a study of man, to which the lectures
are to a large extent devoted. The characteristics of man and the
influence of geographical environment are most easily discerned
in primitive societies; consequently these are examined in some
detail. From these as a starting point the relationships between
man and his environment in complex western civilization is
investigated.
A knowledge of the main facts in the geography of Canada
is assumed so that if the student is not already familiar with them
he must become so by private study, for he is expected to be able to
give the principles brought out in class work Canadian applications and to be able to furnish Canadian illustrations.
Text-book:  Peattie, New College Geography, Ginn & Co.
An Atlas—failing a large, comprehensive atlas, one of the
following cheap ones will serve: Philip's Senior School Atlas, Geo.
Philip & Son; Canadian School Atlas, J. M. Dent; Goode's School
Atlas, Rand McNally Co.
Three hours a week. Mr. Brock. 3 units. 120 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of History
Professor:   W. N. Sage.
Associate Professor:  F. H. Soward.
Assistant Professor:  A. C. Cooke.
Instructor: Sylvia Thrupp.
Assistant: Margaret Ormsby.
(It may be found necessary to make certain changes in the
courses for the session 1935-36.)
Students who intend to specialize in history or who are preparing for the Teacher Training Course are advised to associate with
it such allied subjects as Economies, Government, Sociology and
Geography. Economics 1, 2, 9, 10; Government 1, 3, 4; Sociology
1 and Geography 1 will be found especially helpful. Attention,
however, is called to the regulation in paragraph 3, page 83.
A reading knowledge of French and German will be found
extremely valuable in Third and Fourth Year courses, while in
certain classes of more advanced work Latin is indispensable.
French, at least, will be required for Honour work, and the
study of German is strongly recommended.
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Twentieth-Century History.—This course
completes the study of World history in the High Schools and
offers a background for contemporary World problems. The following topics are discussed: The Great Powers at the Opening of
the Century, Alliance and Entente, The Coming of the World War,
The World War, The Peace Treaties, The New Map of Europe,
Reparations and War Debts, Security and Disarmament, The
League of Nations, The Russian Revolution and the U.S.S.R., Italy
and Fascism, Germany from Empire to Third Reich, Post-War
Britain and Democratic Europe, The New Balkans, The Little
Entente and Poland, Nationalism and Imperialism in the Far East,
The United States and World Peace.
Text-books: Benns, Europe Since 1914; Langsam, The World
Since 1914; Cole, The Intelligent Man's Review of Europe Today;
Schmitt, The Triple Alliance and Triple Entente; J. F. Horrabin,
Atlas of Current Events.
Essays will be assigned throughout the Session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
2. (a) Outlines of Canadian History.—Geographical factors;
exploration and early settlements; political and constitutional
development to Confederation; economic and social history; The
Dominion of Canada since 1867; Canada in the Empire; Canada
in the world. History 121
(i!>) The History of British Columbia. — Early explorations,
Spanish, Russian and British; Maritime fur-trade; Overland fur-
trade; the North West Company; The Hudson's Bay Company in
Old Oregon; the Colonial Period; Confederation; the Province of
British Columbia.
Text-books: Lucas and Egerton, A Historical Geography of
Canada, Parts I and II; Skelton, The Canadian Dominion; New-
bigin, Canada; Wittke, A History of Canada; Howay, British
Columbia, the Making of a Province; Sage, Sir James Douglas and
British Columbia.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sage. 3 units.
4. Medieval History.—A sketch of Medieval History from the
Council of Nicsea to the Fall of Constantinople. The following
subjects will be discussed: The triumph of Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire, the Barbarian Invasions;
the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and Islam; the rise
of the Papacy; the Franks and Charlemagne; the struggle between
Empire and Papacy; the Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the
Medieval Towns; the later monastic movements; the rise of
the Universities; Frederick II; the later Medieval Empire; the
national kingdoms in France, Spain and England; the Turks and
the Byzantine Empire. A
Text-books: Thompson, History of the Middle Ages; Munro
and Sontag, The Middle Ages; Scott, Hyma and Noyes, Readings
in Medieval History.
This course is intended primarily for Second Year students who
hope to specialize in history.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session. 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
History 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are intended for Third Year
students; History 15, 19 and 20 for Fourth Year. History 10 must
be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in a combined course) must take the History Seminars in their Third and
Fourth Years. The Seminar is offered as a training in intensive
work and carries no credits.
If the graduating essay be written in History it will count
as 3 units.
10. British History to the Revolution of 1688.—The geographic
factors; Roman Britain; character and institutions of the Anglo-
Saxons ; relations of Church and State; the Norman Conquest and
the Manorial System; royal supremacy under Normans and
Angevins; the Great Charter; the evolution of Parliament; social 122 Faculty of Arts and Science
conditions in the 14th Century; the Lancastrian Experiment; the
Tudor Monarehy and the Middle Class; the National Church;
agrarian and commercial development; struggle between King and
Parliament; the Puritan Rebellion; the Commonwealth; the
Restoration and the Revolution.
Text-books: Trevelyan, A History of England; Williamson,
The Evolution of England; Davis, England under the Normans
and Angevins; Trevelyan, England under the Stuarts; Lunt, History of England; Adams and Stephens, Documents of English
Constitutional History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sage. 3 units.
11. The Development and Problems of the British Empire-
Commonwealth.
This course is given in two parts, and may be taken for credit
in two successive years.
(a) The Development and Problems of the British Commonwealth.
(b) The Development and Problems of the British Dependent
Empire. 4
In the session 1935-36, and alternate years, 11 (b) will be given
as follows:
The Old Colonial System in its political, economic and international aspects. The loss of the Thirteen American Colonies
and the acquisition and constitutional evolution of a second
empire. The rise of British power in India. The British West
Indian Colonies. Native policy in Australia and New Zealand.
Origins of the South African race problem. The Industrial
Revolution and British commercial policies. Oceanic colonies
and naval bases. Britain in Egypt. The Partition of Africa.
Problems of native administration in East and West Africa.
Social and cultural problems of race contact. Economic problems of the dependent empire. The Colonial Service. Colonies
and Imperial defence.    Exploitation or trusteeship.
Readings and reports will be assigned. Bibliographies for voluntary summer reading will be supplied.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
12. History of the United States of America. — This course
begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak of
the Revolution and traces the history of the United States from the
commencement of the War of Independence to the close of the
World War. History 123
Text-books: Charles and Mary Beard, The Rise of American
Civilisation; J. T. Adams, The Epic of America; H. Faulkner,
American Economic History; F. J. Turner, The Frontier in
American History.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Soward. 3 units.
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—The Cultural Development of Europe from the 14th to the 17th Centuries.
The transition from the medieval to the modern world; humanism;
renaissance art; overseas exploration and expansion; the rise of
modern capitalism- and national states; the Reformation; the
counter-Reformation; the scientific revolution and intellectual
developments.
Text-books: Hulme, Renaissance and Reformation; Lucas, The
Renaissance and the Reformation.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Tnree hours a week.   Mr. Cooke. d^% 3 units.
14.. The Age of Louis XIV; The Revolutionary and Napoleonic
Era.—Europe in the 17th Century; the establishment of absolutism;
the ascendancy of France; expansion and conflict overseas; the
enlightened despots; the age of reason; the French Revolution;
Napoleon; the Congress of Vienna.
Text-books: Benians, Renaissance to Revolution; Packard, The
Age of Louis XIV; Bruun, The Enlightened Despots; Gottschalk,
The Era of the French Revolution; or Rose, The Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Era; Fournier or Kircheisen, Napoleon.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
15. Europe, 1815-1919. — The political, social and economic
history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with especial
attention to international relations.
Text-books: Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European
History; Fueter, World History; Moon, Imperialism and World
Politics;Buell, International Relations.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session. 3 units.
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and religious
development of the British Isles since 1688.
Text-books: Grant Robertson, England Under the Hanoverians;
Williamson, The Evolution of England; Fay, Life and Labour in
the Nineteenth Century; Trevelyan, British History in the
Nineteenth Century.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-Government.—A survey of
the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present day. The
following subjects will be dealt with: French and British Colonial
Systems;' British experience in Acadia; British policy after the
Treaty of Paris; the Quebec Act; the effect of the American Revolution; the Constitutional Act; the opening of the West; the War
of 1812; the formation of parties and the struggle for Reform;
Durham's Report; the achievement of Responsible Government;
Confederation and the completion of the Dominion, the development of Responsible Government and the growth of nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth; Kennedy,
The Constitution of Canada; Kennedy, Statutes, Treaties and
Documents of the Canadian Constitution, 1713-1929.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
21. Methods in High School History.—This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does
not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Two hours a week in Spring term only.  Mr. Cooke.
22. Honours Seminars:
(a) Third Year: Historical Method. Mr. Soward.
(b) Fourth Year:    Queen Victoria and Her Ministers of
State.    Mr. Sage.
Department of Mathematics
Professor:   Daniel Buetianan.
Professor:   F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor:   E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor:  L. Richardson.
Assistant Professor:   Walter H. Gage.
Assistant Professor:   F. J. Brand.
Instructor: May L Barclay
Mathematics 2 and 3 are Second Year Courses. Mathematics
2 is a prerequisite for all the Honour Courses. Mathematics 4 is
a Third or Fourth Year course open to the Second Year.
General Courses
1. (a) Algebra.—An elementary course, including ratio, proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory of quadratic equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binomial
theorem, logarithms.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to XV,
Oxford. Four hours a week.   First Term. Mathematics 125
(b) Analytical Geometry. — Fundamental concepts, loci, the
straight line and circle.
Nowlan, Analytical Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry.—An elementary course involving the use
of logarithms.
Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables, Ginn.
Two hours a week.   Second Term. 3 units.
2. (a) Algebra. — The binomial theorem, complex numbers,
induction, remainder theorem, Horner's method, exponential, logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial fractions,
convergence and divergence, determinants.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger Edition),
Oxford.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(6) Calculus. — An introductory course in differential and
integral calculus, with various applications.
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus (Revised Edition),
Ginn.
One hour a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit.
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course deals
with the exponential law, the power law, curve fitting, the theory
of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds,
depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance.
Bauer, Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and Finance, Macmillan; Hart, Mathematics of Investment (Revised), Heath.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Brand. 3 units.
4. Descriptive Astronomy. — An introductory course dealing
with the solar system, stellar motions, the constitution of the stars,
and nebulae.
Baker, Astronomy, Van Nostrand, latest edition.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Gage. 2 units.
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection
with this course may register for Mathematics 18.   They will be
required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with various
phases of Astronomy. 1 unit.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of the
subject.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 3 units. 126 Faculty of Arts and Science
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane
trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De Moivre's
theorem, expansions of sin nO, etc., hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical trigonometry will cover the solution
of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy.
Text:  To be announced.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Brand. 2 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
12. Differential Equations.—Ordinary and partial differential
equations with various applications to geometry, mechanics, physics
and chemistry.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 2 units.
This course may be taken concurrently with Mathematies 10.
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general study
of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work in three
dimensions. a+
Three hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. ,3 units.
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants.—A course covering
the main theory and use of these subjects. Introduction to Matrices.
Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, Wiley.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra.—Selected topics in higher algebra, including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers,
probability.
Hall and Knight, Higher Algebra, Macmillan; Chrystal, Textbook of Algebra, Part II.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Jordan. 2 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
16. Advanced Calculus.—A continuation of the previous course
in calculus, treating partial differentiation, expansions of functions
of many variables, singular points, reduction formulas, successive
integration, elliptic integrals, and Fourier series.
Two hours a week.  Mr. Buchanan. 2 units.
■■   17. Applied Mathematics.—A course dealing with the applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body;
and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics.
Prerequisite:   Physics 6. Mathematics 127
Loney, A Treatise on Dynamics of a Particle and Rigid Bodies,
Cambridge.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Richardson. 3 units.
This course may be taken either as an undergraduate or a
graduate course.
,      (Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the
historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics
from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics; Cajori, History of Elementary
Mathematics; Smith, History of Mathematics.     Mr. Gage.   1 unit.
19. Methods in High School Mathematics.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Richardson.
Graduate Courses
20. Vector Analysis.—Weatherburn, Vector Analysis.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Vana&Ze.—Goursat-Hedrick,
Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I.
22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—MacRobert,
Functions of a Complex Variable.
23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry.
^Projective Geometry.—~Veb\en and Young, Projective Geometry, Vol. I. *^
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to Celestial
Mechanics.
26. Advanced Differential Equations. — Moulton, Differential
Equations.
27. Theory of Numbers and Algebraic Numbers.
28. Linear Algebras. — Dickson, Algebren und ihre Zahlen-
theorie.
29. Modern Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modern Algebraic
Theories.
30. Elliptic and Bessel Functions.—Byerly, Integral Calculus,
Whittaker and Watson; Modern Analysis, Gray, Mathews and Mac-
Robert, Bessel Functions. 128 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: 	
Professor:   D. O. Evans.
Professor:  A. F. B. Clark.
Associate Professor:   Isabel Maclnnes.
Assistant Professor:  Janet T. Greig.
Instructor: Joyce Hallamore.
Instructor:  Wessie Tipping.
Instructor:  Dorothy Dallas'.
Instructor:   Madame G. Barry.
Instructor:  Madame D. Darlington.
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course, a
student taking a General Course B.A. Degree may be admitted to
any course in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not
in lieu of, 3 (a) and 4(a); and a student taking a B.Com. degree may
be admitted to French 3 (b) in lieu of French 3 (a). Students from
other universities who have already taken the work of 3 (a) and
4 (a) may be given speeial permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other courses. .f
French
1. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme, Didier; Maupassant,
Contes (Nelson) ; Mills, Free Composition in French (Nelson),
Part I; Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans, Toronto, (Chaps.
I to VII, and XI); Weekley, Tutorial French Grammar, Clive.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth Year
Courses. 3 units.
Prerequisite:   Junior matriculation French or its equivalent.
2. La Fontaine, Fables (Dent); Balzac, Gob seek (Oxford
University Press) ; Gautier, Le Capitaine Fracasse (Dent). Independent reading will be required.
Conversation in French on the above.    Written resumes.
3 units.
Summer Reading:   See the announcement  after the Fourth
Year Courses.
Prerequisite:  French 1 or its equivalent.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on
the history and social conditions of the period, and on the development of the literature. Careful reading and discussion of the
following texts: Schinz and King, Seventeenth Century French
Readings (Holt) ; Corneille, Le Cid (Didier) ; Racine, Iphigenie
(American Book Co.) or Phedre (Heath); Moliere, Le Misanthrope
(Didier), or L'Avare (Manchester Univ. Press); Le Tartuffe
(Heath).
Conversation and written resumes based on the above. Modern Languages 129
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year
French. French 2 is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write
French with some facility are advised not to attempt 3 (a).
Students who intend to take French throughout the four years
or who wish to teach this subject should also take 3 (c).       3 units.
3. (6) The Literature of the XlXth Century (Verse and
Novel). Nine French Poets (Macmillan) ; Hugo, Poemes choisis
(Manchester University Press); Balzac, Eugenie Grandet (Oxford). Independent readings will be specified. This course is
intended for Honours students.
3. (c) French Composition. Phonetics. 1 hour a week. Composition and oral practice, 2 hours. No tests are specified.  3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses. a*
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Lectures on the evolution of
the drama during the XlXth Century. Hugo, Hernani; Alfred de
Vigny, Chatterton (Oxford); Musset, Three Plays (Nelson);
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac (Holt); Stewart and Tilley, The
Romantic Movement in French Literature (Cambridge). Extensive independent reading will be expected. 3 units.
French 3 (a) is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write
accurate French with facility and understand spoken French are
advised not to attempt 4 (a).
4. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, with special
emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of
romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought
and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire (Havens),
Century Co.; Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet), Didier; Diderot, Extraits (Fallex), Delagrave; Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de
Seville, Macmillan.
French 3 (a) and 3 (b) are prerequisites.
4. (c) French Composition Practice in oral French, readings
and discussion, free composition and translation. Lectures on
French institutions, one hour. This course should be taken in conjunction with French 4 (a) and French 4 (6). 3 units.
Prerequisite: French 3 (c).
5. (a) Methods in High School. Modern Languages. Study
and analysis of the methods of teaching Modern Languages, with
special reference to French and German; discussion of classroom
problems and practical demonstrations.    This course is provided 130 Faculty of Arts and Science
for students in the Teacher Training Course and does not carry
undergraduate credit.
5. (b) Old French and XVIth Century. Texts: Aucassin et
Nicolette (Classiques frangais du Moyen Age); Rabelais, Gar-
gantua (Jouaust) • Ronsard, Oeuvres choisies (Larousse); Montaigne, Essais (Gamier).   (For M.A. candidates only.)
5. (c) The History of French Literary Criticism and Theory,
from the Pleiade to the Present Day.—Vial-Denise, Idees et Doctrines Litteraires du XVIIe Siecle, Idees et Doctrines Litteraires du
XVIIIe Siecle, Idees et Doctrines Litteraires du XIXe Siecle (three
vols., Delagrave).
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for the years stated, the student
must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned
below.
Second Year:
1. Balzac, Le Pere Goriot.
2. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala*
2. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes, Les Precieuses Ridicules.
3. Vigny, Servitude et Grandeur Militaires*
4. Musset, Poesies Choisies.
Fourth Year:
1. Marivaux, Le Jeu de I'Amour et du Hasard.
2. Voltaire, Contes*
3. Voltaire, Zaire.
4. Sedaine, Le Philosophe Sans le Savoir*
5. Bernardin de Saint-Pierre, Paul et Virginie*
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Banville, Gringoire*
The above have all been chosen from the series Les Classiques
pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for vacation
reading. At the present rate of exchange they can he bought at
the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these
books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd moments, no
excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading.
Note:—Those books marked with an asterisk (*) are expected
to be read by Honours students only. Philosophy 131
German
Beginners' Course. — Evans and Rdseler, College German,
Crofts; Koischwitz, BUderlesebuch, Crofts. 3 units.
1. Pope, Writing and Speaking German (New Series), Holt.
Composition and conversation based on texts read. Kastner, Emit
und die Detektive, Holt; Moser, Der Bibliothekar, Ginn; Bruns,
Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with-alternate reading. 3 unite.
Junior Matriculation or Beginners' German is prerequisite for
this course.
2. Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Composition, Holt.
Composition and conversation based on texts read.
Diamond and Schomaker, Lust und Leid, Holt; Keller, Romeo
und Julia auf dem Dorfe, Holt; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics.
3 units.
German 1, or its equivalent, is prerequisite for German 2.
3 (a) Introduction to the Classical Period.
Lectures on the development of Eighteenth Century literature.
Texts for special study: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath; Goethe,
Faust I, Heath; Schiller, Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt. Composition text:  Whitney and Stroebe, German Composition, Holt.
3 units.
Summer Reading: Before entering German 3 students must
read: Fleissner, Deutsches Literatur-Lesebuch, Crofts, to page
92. (J. G. Robertson, The Literature of Germany, Home University Library, is also recommended.)
3. (b) Introduction to Modern Literature.— Texts: Lipzin,
From Novalis to Nietzsche, Prentice-Hall; Porterfield, Modern
German Stories, Heath; and other assigned reading. 3 units.
4. (a) Nineteenth Century German Drama.—Text: Campbell,
German Plays of the Nineteenth Century, Crofts. 3 units.
4. (b) Nineteenth Century German Fiction. 3 units.
Courses 4 (a) and 4 (b) are given alternately.
Department of Philosophy
Professor:   H. T. J. Coleman.
Associate Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Associate Professor:	
1. (a) Elementary Psychology.
Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology, (Revised
Edition), Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week.   Mrs. Pilcher 3 units. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
1. (6) Introduction to Philosophy.—This course is intended
for two classes of students: First, those who contemplate specializing in Philosophy either as Honour or Pass students in their Third
and Fourth Years; and second, those who wish a single course
which will give in an untechnical way a statement and discussion
of fundamental philosophical problems and thus assist them in
their special studies in other departments.
Text:   Patrick, Introduction to Philosophy, Houghton Mifflin.
References: Brightman, An Introduction to Philosophy; Cunningham, Problems of Philosophy; Drake, An Invitation to Philosophy; Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy; Perry, The
Approach to Philosophy.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
2., Ethics.
Text-book:  Urban, Fundamentals of Ethics, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's
Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic of Morals.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato (inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy,
Scribners. Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part I), Macmillan. In
connection with this course a special study will be made of Plato's
Republic, Phaedo, and Philebus.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
4. The history of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the
Present Time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy, Macmillan.
References: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the Critique
of Pure Reason.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements Since the Time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and
others.
Three hours a week. 3 unite.
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.) Philosophy 133
7. Philosophy of Education.—A course of lectures and discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning
of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of mind
which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey, Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education; Rousseau,
Emile; Locke, The Conduct of the Understanding; Froebel, The
Education of Man; Dewey, The School and Society; Articles in the
Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 (a) or Philosophy 1 (b) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology.—A study of those particular phases of
mental life and development which are fundamental in social
organization and activity.
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London; Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen,
London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following:
Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution; Sutherland,
Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct; Cooley, Human Nature
and the Social Order; Wallas, Human Nature in Politics, The Great
Society; Ross, Social Psychology; Trotter, Instincts of the Herd in
Peace and War; Bernard, Introduction to Social Psychology.
Philosophy 1 (a) or Philosophy 1 (b) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
9. (1) A Study of the Concept of Intelligence.—Current theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its practical bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the measurement of intelligence. History of the movement. The nature and
causes of mental defects and peculiarities.
(2) Principles of Experimental Procedure.—Method of Measurement. Practical training in the methods of group examinations.
Treatment of subnormal, normal and gifted children. Treatment
of problem cases.
Text:   Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week.   Mrs. Pilcher. 3 units. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Physics
Professor:  T. C. Hebb.
Professor:  A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor:  J. G. Davidson.
Associate Professor:  G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: George Volkoff.
...■';:- Assistant: Robert Christy.
f Assistant: George Mossop.
Assistant: Kenneth R. McKenzie.
Assistant: Henry H. Clayton.
Primarily for First and Second Year Students
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles
of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and electricity, both in the lecture room and in the laboratory. The course
has two objects: (1) to give the minimum acquaintance with
physical science requisite for a liberal education to those whose
studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to the
courses in Chemistry, Engineering and Advanced Physics. Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical and
practical work. Open only to students who have not matriculated
in Physics. ^ ^
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Edwards, A First Course in
Physics for Colleges.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Elementary Physics.—This course consists of a general course
in Physics suitable for those students who have obtained standing
in Junior Matriculation Physics or its equivalent. It covers mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, electricity and
some of the more recent developments and theories.
Text-book: Chant and Burton, A Text-book of College Physics,
Copp Clark.
Prerequisite:  High School Physics.
Three lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a week.
3 units.
References: Watson, A Text-book of Physics, Longmans; Kaye
and Laby, Physical and Chemical Constants, Longmans.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of statics
and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the laws of
gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity, expansion,
and calorimetry.
Text-books:   Reynolds, Elementary Mechanics, Prentice-Hall;
Edser, Heat for Advanced Students, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:  Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units. Physics 135
4. Modern Physics.—This is a general course for students who
are not specializing in physics, but who are interested in the recent
developments in this branch of science. It includes descriptions
and discussions of many of the fundamental experiments which
are responsible for the present viewpoint in physics. Analytical
demonstrations, such as are given, do not involve advanced mathematics. Among the topics treated are: The nature of light, the
quantum theory, radioactivity, electronic phenomena, X-rays, relativity, astrophysics, and cosmic rays.
Candidates for Honours in Physics receive no credit for this
course.
Text-books: Jauncey, Modern Physics, Van Nostrand; Blackwood, Outline of Atomic Physics, Wiley; Eldridge, The Physical
Basis of Things, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite, Physics 1 or 2.
Three lectures per week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the fundamentals
of magnetism and electricity, including alternating currents and
electron physics.
Text-book:  Zeleny, Elements of Electricity, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:  Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A selected course in statics, dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body. •
Text-book:  Smith and Longley, Ginn.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Theoretical Physics.—A course of lectures
upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity, and hydromechanics.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
8. Physical Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by laboratory work, covering optical instruments, interference, diffraction,
polarisation, the nature of light and experiments on ether drift.
Text-book:  Wood, Physical Optics, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a week.
3 units.
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
10. Light.—A short lecture course for students who have not
taken Physics 8.   A study of optical instruments, light sources and 136 Faculty of Arts and Science
filters, spectroscopy, photometry, energy measurements, refrac-
tometers, interference, diffraction and polarised light.
Text-book: Robertson, Introduction to Physical Optics, Van
Nostrand.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
11. Electricity and Magnetism.—In this course especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and Magnetism.
Text-book:   Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 5 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
12. Introduction to Atomic Structure.—A course of lectures
dealing with the conduction of electricity through gases, cathode
and positive rays, elementary spectroscopy, X-rays, radioactivity
and other atomic phenomena.
Text-book: Riehtmyer, Introduction to Modern Physics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 5, and Differential and Integral
Calculus.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving an
exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent
experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book:   Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering the fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book:   Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
19. Experimental Physics.—This is chiefly a laboratory course
covering work in thermionics, spectroscopy, high vacua and general
laboratory technique.
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts and bibliographies will
constitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours laboratory a week. 2 to 3 units.
With the consent of the Head of the Department Fourth Year
students may select one or more units from the following graduate
courses: Physics 137
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the methods of excitation and
observation of spectra, series in arc and spark spectra, multiplets,
Zeeman and Stark effects, and band spectra.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure.—A study of the theories
of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected from current
literature.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
22. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. — A study of the
Electromagnetic theory and its application, the theories of metallic
conduction, and electrical oscillations.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the applications of Vector Analysis to problems in Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure.—A study of the modern
methods of production and observation of X-rays, the Compton
effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of crystals.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
25. The Theory of Sound.—A course of lectures covering the
propagation of sound, and the general phenomena associated with
vibrating systems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
26. The Theory of Potential.—A general course giving the
applications of the Theory of Potential to Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
27. TJve Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course to the
Theory of Relativity.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
28. Quantum Mechanics.—An introduction to the theory of
Quantum Mechanics, and the application of Wave Mechanics to
atomic problems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
40. Methods in High School Physics.—This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does
not carry undergraduate credit.   Readings to be assigned.
Two hours a week.    Second Term. 138 Faculty op Arts and Science
Department of Zoology
Professor:  C. McLean Fraser.
Associate Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant Professor:  Gertrude M. Smith.
Assistant:  C. Morley Neal.
Assistant: George P. Holland.
Note:—Biology 1(a) is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups. Comparative life-histories.
Text-book: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week.   First Term.
2 units.
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week.   Second Term.
2 units.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
A collection of insects is required.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week.    First Term.
2 units.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Entomology.
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of animal tissues.   Methods of histology.
Ten hours a week.   Second Term. 3 units.
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of embryological
sections.
Ten hours a week. First Term. 3 units.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of animals and plants; means of combating thelm.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours a week.   Second Term.
2 units. Zoology 139
8. Private Reading.—A course of reading on Biological theories.
In this course examinations will be set, but no class instruction
will be given. 2 units.
9. Advanced Entomology.—A course in (a) Insect Morphology
and wing venation, or (6) Internal Anatomy and Histology, or
(c) Taxonomy.
Prerequisite:  Zoology 4.
Lecture and laboratory work seven hours a week.   First Term.
2 unite.
Courses correlated with the work for the major thesis are given
to graduate students.
"ME^O^"  THE
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE
(ENGINEERING, NURSING AND HEALTH)  FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train students
in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound knowledge
of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and
natural products for the benefit of man and the advancement of
civilization. Experience shows that such a training is the best yet
devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative,
supervisory and technical positions.
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or
industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development
in the school of experience—but young men with a special capacity
and training for attaining these goals, and thus for helping to
develop the industries of the province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than narrow
and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the
British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in
his after-fife, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes
a more solid foundation, a better background, a broader outlook
and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist
is to achieve the maximum results of which he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an
additional year of graduate study. The First Year is intended
to increase the student's general knowledge and to broaden his
outlook. It is hoped that enough interest will be aroused to
encourage the student to continue some study of the humanities
as a hobby or recreation.
The Second and Third years in Applied Science are spent in a
general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic sciences.
This gives not only a broad training, but enables the student to
discover the work for which he has special liking or aptitude and
to select more intelligently the subjects in which to specialize
during the final two years. During these two years students
acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying
scientific principles and knowledge, in solving problems, in doing
things; and there is also training in Economics, Law and Industrial
Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is required
to engage in some industrial or professional work that will afford
practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory or field classes,
but that is a necessary supplement to academic study. 144 Faculty of Applied Science
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of the
University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers
of the Province of British Columbia in lieu of four of the six
years' practical experience required by the Engineering Act of
the Province for registration to practise engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their third year; and
to associate themselves with the appropriate engineering societies.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University are
given on Pages 29-33.
As for Arts, complete Junior Matriculation or its equivalent
is required for admission to Applied Science, and no student may
enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior Matriculation.
Admission to the Second Year in Applied Science may be
granted to students who have fulfilled the requirements of the
First Year, as outlined below, by Senior Matriculation or similar
work taken outside of the University; but students who are considering entering Applied Science are recommended to take the
First Year at the University of British Columbia, if they can, for,
while they may master the required subject matter as well outside,
in the opinion of the Faculty it is highly desirable to have had a
year's experience at the University before entering Second Year
Applied Science.      ^^^l
This experience includes special orientation lectures, contact
with Arts students, with Applied Science senior students, with
specialists, with college organizations, and generally with the
University methods and adjustments which prepare him to attack
the difficult and heavy work of the Second Year efficiently from the
outset, or to select another University course, if desired, on the
basis of a year's experience and without loss of time.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc).   (See Page 145.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc).   (See Page 172.) Courses in Applied Science 145
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the
completion of the work in one of the coursest given below:
I. Chemical Engineering.
II. Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V. Forest Engineering.
VI. Geological Engineering.
VII. Mechanical Engineering.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering
IX. Mining Engineering.
X. Nursing and Health.
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science is
offered, leading to the degrees of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See Page
171.)
This course is strongly recommended to students who are
young enough to afford the time and to students wishing to enter
Applied Science, and who have to their credit some, but not all,
of the requirements of First Year Applied Science as set forth on
Page 147. The latter can select subjects in their Second Year Arts
that will satisfy the Arts requirements for the double degree, and
at the same time complete the work of First Year Applied Science.
Thus they may qualify for an Arts degree without expending any
more time than would be required to qualify them for entrance
into Second Year Applied Science.
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE
UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important
that the work done at the University should be supplemented by
practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students
are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give
such experience.
Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required to
satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least four
months' practical work related to his chosen profession. Fourth
and Fifth Year Essays (see Page 149) should be based, as far as
possible, upon the summer work.
tThe curriculum described In the following pages may be changed from
time to time as deemed advisable by the Senate. 146 Faculty op Applied Science
Upon approval of the Dean and the head of the Department
concerned, University credit may be granted for work done outside
the University under the immediate supervision of the University
staff, during the University session.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing, Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the University, may
be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but not in lieu of
lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the Head
of the Department and approval of the Dean. Students seeking
exemption as above must make written application to the Dean,
accompanied by certificates indicating the character of the work
done and the time devoted to it.
OPENING OF SESSION
Lectures begin on Wednesday, September the 26th, and
it is essential to the success of the student that he should be in
attendance at the opening of the session, for, in order to allow as
much time as possible for practical work in the summer, the length
of the session has been reduced to the minimum consistent with the
ground to be covered. Consequently a student requires the full
session to master the work. A mere pass standing is a very unsatisfactory preparation for subsequent work or professional life.
Further, from this standpoint, the opening work is the most important of the whole session for the student, for in it are given the
general instructions necessary for the proper attack upon the work.
The only exception is when the summer employment affords
experience necessary for the course the student is specializing in,
which will lighten to some extent the work of the session (such
as in Geological Survey field work for geological students) and
then only when the nature of this work makes it impossible for
the student to reach the University on the opening day. Under
these circumstances, if the student furnishes a statement from his
employer showing it was impossible for him to release the student
earlier, the Dean may allow the student to enter without penalty.
The student must, however, register at the opening of the session
in accordance with the regulations in reference to registration.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATIONS
A student with supplementals must write them off at the
regular time for supplemental examinations before the opening of
the session, for he will need the entire session for the current year's
work. It is also necessary, for a successful year, to have a satisfactory knowledge of the foundational work of the preceding year.
No exceptions to the above rule will be granted except as under
Paragraph 4, above. Courses in Applied Science 147
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students in Nursing and Health register directly in Applied
Science and take the special course outlined on Pages 163-170. AIL
other students of Applied Science have a general course common
to all for the first three years as under:
FIRST YEAR
The students register in Arts and take the following classes
as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry).
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2.
Latin 1 or French 1 or *German B.       k^^^
The passing grade is 50 per cent, for English, Chemistry,
Physics, German B, and each of the Mathematical subjects, but in
the others a mark of 40 per cent, will be accepted provided an
average of 60 per cent, has been obtained in the total work of the
year. No student with defective standing will be admitted to
Second Year Applied Science.
Biology 1, if taken as an optional extra subject, and passed
with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be repeated in the
Second Year. Economics 1, taken in Arts, is accepted in lieu of
Economics in Applied Science.
A student who avails himself of either of these options will
nevertheless be deemed to be taking a full year's course in the later
year for the purpose of standing and competition for general proficiency scholarships, but in awarding these scholarships the mark
obtained in the transferred subject in the earlier year may be used
as if it had been obtained in the later year.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable for
students in Engineering.
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science, but
who have failed to make the necessary entrance requirements for
the Second Year Applied Science, may take the September Supplemental Examinations of Arts and Science.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour talks
on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in various
callings likely to be selected by Applied Science graduates, as
these may assist the student in determining whether Applied
Science is the best eourse for him. If he finds it is not, he can
proceed in Arts without any loss of time.
♦Applied Science students are advised to take Beginners' German. 148
Faculty op Applied Science
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same in all
courses, except those in Nursing and Health.
SECOND YEAR
Subject
4j bo
S. a
First Term
a u
a
« tn <U
'" E »
Second Term
Math. 1  Trigonometry	
Math. 2 Solid Geometry	
Math. 3 Algebra	
Math. 4 Calculus	
CE. 1 Descriptive Geom	
M.E. 1 Drawing 1	
Physics 3 Mechanics	
Physics 4 Heat	
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis ...
MJE. 2a Shop Practice	
Biology I* Introductory	
CE. 2 Surveying	
CE. 30 Engineering Prob. 1
199
199
199
200
181
200
213
213
178
201
170
181
189
3
2
I
Field Work
4
•Biology  1, Arts,  passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent,  will be
accepted in lieu of this course.
THIRD YEAR
No student with defective standing will be admitted to the
Third Year of Applied Science.
Subject
« a,
a a.
u v
o a>
First Term
■§a-«"
2sSJ
IS*
Second Term
Math. 6 Calculus	
Math. 7 Anal. Geom.	
Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis	
CE. 4 Graphics _	
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory	
Physics' 5 Electricity
Physics 6 Mechanics	
C.E. 5 Mapping	
CE. 6 Surveying	
Geology 1 General
fCE. 7 Surveying	
C.E. 31 Engineering Prob. 2
200
200
178
181
202
213
218
182
182
195
182
189
Field Work
..    I      3    1.
tStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining
Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 182) immediately after the spring examinations. Courses in Applied Science 149
FOURTH AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth and
Fifth Years, and must conform to the following :
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects
of the work on which the student was engaged during the
sumimer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which
he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage may
be taken of any source of information, but due acknowledgment
must be made of all authorities consulted. It should be suitably
illustrated by drawings, sketches, photographs or specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of substantial quality, standard letter size (8^x11 inches), on one
side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top and
left-hand side. Every student must submit a duplicate copy
of his essay, for the correction of English. If typewritten,
essays must be "double-spaced." Students are recommended
to examine sample reports to be found in the departments and
also copies of Masters' Theses in the library.
4.  All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students may submit
duplicate copies of their essays in competition for the students'
prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian
Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A
maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on
presentation, English, including spelling, and matter. In Fourth
Year essays, presentation, that is, the manner in which the material
is arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight,
with English second and matter third. In Fifth Year essays, most
emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still rated
highly.
COURSES
I.    Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering is designed to prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical manufacturing plant. As such he must be conversant not only with
the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to design 150
Faculty op Applied Science
and to oversee the construction of new buildings and to direct the
installation and use of machinery. Hence the course of study
includes, especially in the first three years, a number of courses
in the older branches of engineering. In the fourth and fifth
years the maximum of chemical training, allowed by the time at
the disposal of the student, is given in inorganic, organic and
physical chemistry. Special emphasis is laid on such problems as
the operation of electrolytic cells and electric furnaces, the transportation of gases, liquids and solids, combustion, grinding, mixing,
drying, evaporation, distillation, condensation, filtration and
adsorption processes.
Fourth Year
Subject
fa »
fete
First Term
is*
Second Term
bh
Essay 	
Economics 1  (Arts)	
Met. 1  Introductory	
Geol. 2 (a)  Mineralogy.
Chem. 3 Organic..;	
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis...
E.E. I General : j
Physics 7 Light m.
CE. 12 Hydraulics 1
149
190
ZI1
196
178
179
179
205
213
184
Fifth Year
1 si.
«£
0 8>
few
First Term
Second Term
Subject
ii
ft
ft
b*>
rt w v
b 2 «
5 b
ft
n
5s
149
179
180
180
180
180
180
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
3
3
12
2
2
2
2
3
:: I
!         1
Chem. 8 Electro	
3
3
3
Chem. 16 Engineering	
Chem. 12	
15 Courses in Applied Science
151
II.   Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice
of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the fundamental
principles of this subject, that they may be prepared to assist in
the solution of problems of value to the industrial and agricultural
life of the Province. The course is arranged to give in the first
two years a knowledge of the fundamental principles of Chemistry
and Physics, with sufficient mathematics to enable the theoretical
parts of the subject to be understood.
In the Fourth Year, Analytical, Organic and Physical Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to technology; while in the Fifth Year a considerable amount of time is
devoted to a short piece of original work.
Fourth Year
Qfl.
fa «
St, to
First Term
Second Term
.                          Subject
Lectures
per Week.
b*
fa v
« „ «
5«
Lectures
per Week.
5a
149
190
178
179
179
211
196
211
131
213
3
2
2
1
2
2
1
3
I
3
3
6
2
5
3
2
2
1
2
3
1
Economics 1  (Arts)	
Chem. 3 Organic...	
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis	
Met. 1  Introductory	
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy	
Met 5 Assaying	
German B (Arts)	
Physics 7 Light	
3
3
6
Fifth Year
Subject
a a,
First Term
•Ji
P » »
fa. ".?
r
i
5
Second Term
►4 4>
S°-M
Hi
Essay  -	
Bacteriology 1   (Arts).
Physics 12 Advanced	
Chem. 6 Industrial	
Chem. 7 Physical	
Chem. 8 Electro.	
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic.
Met. 2 General	
Thesis 	
149
88
213
179
180
180
180
211
18 152 Faculty of Applied Science
III.   Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an
adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil
Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated
with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health,
comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth.
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems
in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems,
sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation and
drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures,
bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and protective
works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways, electric and
steam railways; and in the management and direction of public
works, public utilities, industrial and commercial enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide, in so
far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth along
those lines which the student's interest and environment determine,
without compelling too early specialization. Training in pure and
applied science, in the humanities, in economics and engineering
law, and in the technical phases of professional work establishes
a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere spirit of public
service and for the development of that capacity for reliable work
and judgment which makes safe the assumption of responsibilities.
The methods of instruction are planned with the view of
bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while training them in the habits of accurate analysis and careful work.
Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will give
them an insight into the various phases of the career upon which
they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the foundation
for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering activities. In the
Fifth Year thesis an opportunity is given for special investigation
and research under the supervision of experienced engineers. Courses in Applied Science
153
Fourth Year
Subject
2..
First Term
Second Term
P
Qft.
U 4)
fat«
1%
J;
b>-
1§*
5*
11
b>«
5e
149
182
2
3
1
183
1
3
183
2
3
2
3
184
Z
2
184
1
3
1
3
184
3
3
184
2
2
185
2
2
202
3
3
205
2
2
2
2
190
3
3
185
Field Work
186
1
1
1
189
1
1
Essay	
CE. 8 Foundations	
CE. 9 Elementary Design	
CE. 10 a & b Strength of Mtls
CE. II Railways	
CE. 12 a & b Hydraulics	
CE. 13 Mapping	
CE. 14 Surveying	
C.E. 15 Drawing	
M.E. 6(b) Laboratory	
E.E. 1 General	
Economics 1  (Arts)	
CE. 16 Surveying
CE. 21 Water Power	
CE. 28 Seminar	
Fifth Year
Subject
38,
First Term
ft
ges
5b
Second Term
Essay 	
CE. 17 Structural Design	
CE. 18(a) Engineering Economics	
CE. 18(b) Engineering Economics	
19 Law—Contracts	
20 Geodesy -	
22 Municipal	
23 Transportation	
CE. 24(a) Mechanics of Mtls	
CE. 24(b) Reinforced Concrete Design.
C.E. 25 Theory of Structures	
CE. 26 Trips	
CE. 27 Thesis _	
CE. 28 Seminar
CE.
CE.
CE.
CE.
119
185
185
185
185
186
186
187
187
188
188
188
189
CE. 29 Hydraulic Machines |     189
Required Sat A.M.
3
1   1
1   1 154
Faculty of Applied Science
IV.   Electrical Engineering
This course is designed for those students who desire a general
training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering. The
Fourth Year of the course is devoted to the study of the basic
principles of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, and is
intended to prepare the student for the more specialized courses
which are given in the Fifth Year. In the Fifth Year an intensive
course in all the important branches of Design, Transmission,.
Electro-Technology, Radio and Electric Traction, is given, together
with thorough laboratory work in most of these subjects.
Fourth Year
Subject
'Sm
Qft.
First Term
oo M
b*
fa «
!§*
5b
Second Term
3£
5b
•E.E. 2 Direct Current Technology	
*E.E. 3 Elementary AC Technology	
•Math. 8 or 9 (Adv. Calculus)	
•M.E. 3 Kinematics	
•M.E. 7 Heat Engines'....	
*M.E. 4 Dynamics	
•E.E. 5 Electrical and Magnetic
Measurements  and  Instruments	
•E.E. 6 Electrical Problem Course	
•CE. 12 Hydraulics	
•M.E. 5 Machine Design.	
M.E. 5(a) Problem Course in Strength
of Materials and Design	
CE. 10 Strength of Materials	
tM.E. 2 b	
149
205
206
200
201
203
202
206
206
184
202
202
183
201
•Prerequisite for Electrical Students entering Fifth Year.
tOptional. Courses in Applied Science
155
Fifth Year
A..
Ii
II
First Term
Second Term
"                      Subject
Pi
b»>
1=1
5b
n
ft*
bfe
Essay	
E.E. 7 Design of Electrical Machinery
E.E. 8 Electrical Traction and E.E. 9
Transmission and Distribution of
Energy	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
149
207
207
204
204
207
207
200
208
209
203
209
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
2
3
2
4
4
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
~8
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design	
E.E. 10 Electrical Problem Course	
E.E. 11 Radio Telegraphy and
Radio Telephony 	
%
4
Math. 8 or 9 (Differential Equa.
or Adv. Calculus	
E.E. 12 Electro-technology	
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena and
Oscillations 	
4
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines	
E.E. 15 Advanced Mathematical
Theory of Electricity and Magnetism,
including Vector Analysis	
V.   Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging
and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, lead all others.
They must always play a very important part in the economy of
the Province, because seven-eighths of the productive land is
absolute forest soil, that will grow good timber but no other crop
of value; and because over half the remaining stand of saw-timber
— the last big reserve — of Canada is here. The development
of these industries is requiring more and more the services of
engineers, and especially is this true in logging. Furthermore,
most of the forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these vast estates is a task that will require constant
growth on the part of the government forest services.
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open
to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is
designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber industry,
and a major part of the time—apart from the preliminary foundation work—is devoted to the branches of engineering most used
by it. In addition, the fundamental subjects of forestry are
covered.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants, and
plants for seasoning and preserving wood—more, in fact, than any
other place in the Province. Pulp mills, logging operations and
extensive forests are within easy reach. The advantages of location 156
Faculty op Applied Science
are therefore exceptional. A special feature is the affiliation of
the Forest Products Laboratory of Canada, maintained at the
University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion
Forestry Branch. A description of the laboratory and its activities
is given.on Page 194. It affords opportunities for instruction in
testing the mechanical properties of timber and other structural
materials, and facilities are now provided for experimental and
demonstration work in wood seasoning.
The University Forest
A great asset to the University site is the forest, a small
remnant of the luxurious stand that once covered the whole
peninsula. Not only does it add very much to the beauty of the
surroundings, but it is valuable as a shelter belt, a place of
recreation, and a convenient demonstration and field study area
for the departments of Forestry, Botany and Zoology.
The forest is in the form of a long narrow belt on the western
side of the site, flanking Marine Drive for nearly a mile, and
containing over 105 acres. In composition it is typical of the lowland stands of the southern coast, and all the principal species of
trees and shrubs of the region are represented, including specimens
of the old trees as well as a large amount of young growth of
different ages.
A small forest nursery is being developed and used for experimental and demonstration work in silviculture and also to provide
planting stock for the forest.
Fourth Year
I
Subject
£ 6D
Qft,
First Term
8|
Sis
b>-
5a
Second Term
JS
b>*
5«
Essay   	
F.E. 1 General Forestry	
F.E. 2 (a) Mensuration*	
F.E. 3 Protection	
F.E. 6 (a) Management 1	
F.E. 9 Lumbering	
F.E. 14 Seminar	
Bot. 1 General Botany	
Bot. 5b Dendrology	
Economics 1  (Arte)	
CE. 8 (a) Foundations	
CE. 9 Structural Design	
CE.  10  Strength  Materials
CE. 11 Railways	
CE. 12 Hydraulics
CE. 13 Mapping	
CE. 14 Surveying	
149
190
1
190
1
2
191
191
1
192
2
193
1
176
2
2
177
1
2
102
3
182
1
3
183
183
2
3
184
2
184
1
i 1
184
  1
184
2
  1
•Also 1 week Field Work immediately after spring examinations. Courses in Applied Science
157
Fifth Year
01 ##
0) 03
Qft-
fcto
First Term
Second Term
Subject
8«
u o
0.
&1*
5s
sis
fti
5«
Essay 	
F.E. 2 (b) Mensuration	
F.E. 5 Wood Technology	
149
191
191
192
192
192
192
193
193
193
193
177
217
177
185
185
185
2
1
2
2
J}
1
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
1
2
3
1
1
2
21
"2
2
F.E. 6 (b)   Management   2	
F.E. 7 History    	
F.E. 8 Silviculture*	
3
F.E. 10 Logging Engineering*	
F.E. 11 Milling*!.	
4
F.E. 12 Forest Products*	
2J
1    1      2
F.E. 13 Lumber Grading	
F.E. 14 Seminar	
.   1    1    	
F.E. 15 Thesis	
3   :
Bot. 6  (b)  Pathology   )
Zool.  7  Entomology      J	
Bot. 7a Ecology	
CE. 17 Structural Design	
CE.  18 Engineering Economics	
CE. 19 Engineering Law	
1
2
1
•
2
3
•Field trips are required in these courses and students should be prepared for a total expense which should not exceed $20 each.
VI.    Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students
who intend to enter Geology as a profession, and such students are
strongly advised to take this particular course of training.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in the
sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, which
are extensively applied in the solution of geological problems. The
engineering subjects are useful not only to the Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor, but to the Geologist
engaged in original research in any branch of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions
of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist, Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is useful for
those who will be in any way connected with the discovery or
development of the natural resources of the country.
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory and
field during the session, the student is expected to obtain practical
experience during the summer vacation.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. 158
Faculty of Applied Science
Fourth Year
Subject
Qft.
First Term
&
5a
Second Term
? fc
I**
Geol. 2 Mineralogy	
Geol. 4 Structural	
Geol.  5   Regional	
Min. 1 Metal Mining	
Met. 5 Fire Assaying	
Met. 1 General	
Ore Dressing 1 General
Zool. 1 	
CE. 13 Mapping	
Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis'.
Met. 6* Wet Assaying...
149
196
196
197
209
211
211
212
217
184
179
211
2
3
3
2
1
2
2
2
•Either Chem. 5 or Met. 6 must be taken.
Fifth Year
Subject
Is?
Oft,
IS "J
First Term
«
2
!0)
2.8
5a
Second Term
C «
I*
31*
Essay	
Geol. 6 Palaeontology	
Geol. 7 Petrology	
Geol. 8 Economics	
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics
Geol. 9 Mineralography	
Geol. 10 Field	
Min. 2 Coal and Placer	
Min. 3 Metal Mining	
Min. 5 Surveying	
Met. 2 Smelting	
+Ore   Dressing   1	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory.
Thesis 	
149
197
197
197
185
.198
198
209
210
210
211
212
212
U935-36 only. Courses in Applied Science
159
VII.   Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed to
give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and application of those basic subjects which are essential in this branch of
Engineering.
With this in view, stress has been laid upon such subjects as
Mathematics, Physics, Applied Mechanics, Strength of Materials,
Applied Thermodynamics and Hydraulics. Graduates of this
course are therefore qualified to enter upon any of the many
specialized branches of this profession, especially in British
Columbia, whose rapid industrial development demands Mechanical
Engineers prepared to attack a great diversity of problems.
Although fundamentally general in character, the course
embodies design of prime movers; mechanical and hydraulic machinery design; power plant operation and design; and the testing
of engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized
training in Mechanical Engineering to enable students to enter
the field of design or research should they so desire.
Students following this course are given a general course in
the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering.
Fourth Year
Subject
Qft.
First Term
5»
Second Term
S£
5«
*C.E. 10 Strength of Materials	
•M.E. 3 Kinematics	
•M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines	
•M.E. 5 Machine Design	
M.E. 5 (a) Problems in Materials:
and Design 	
•M.E. 7 Heat Engines	
•M.E. 13 Physical Treatment of Metals
E.E. 2 and 3 Electrical DC and
AC Technology 	
•CE. 12 Hydraulics	
•Math. 8 Advanced Calculus or  1
Math. 9 Differential Equations j
tM.E. 2 (b) Shop	
•Essay  	
183
201
202
202
202
203
204
205
184
200
201
•Prerequisite for Mechanical students entering the Fifth Year.
tOptional. 160
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year
«3   ,.
Is
First Term
Second Term
Subject
ii
2eS
5a
4
Sftji
ge«
5»
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines	
203
203
203
203
203
204
204
204
204
204
209
200
201
1}
l
l
2
2
1
1
2
3
5
3
5
2
4
2
i}
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
M.E. 9 Internal Combustion Eng.	
5
M.E. 10 Refrigeration	
fM.E. 11 Heating and Ventilation	
M.E. 12 Power Plant Design	
3
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
M.E. 16 Machine Design	
5
M.E. 17 Applied Mechanics	
+M.E. 18 Aeronautics	
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and
Elec. Eng.	
2
E.E. 14 General	
4
Math. 9 Differential Equations or
Math. 8 Adv. Calculus	
Essay 	
•M.E.  (2b) Shop	
2
tAlternative subjects.
•Optional.
VIII.-IX.    Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Mining and Metallurgy cover too large a field to cover
in detail in a University course, therefore the courses given are
intended to give the students a broad training and knowledge of
the fundamental, technical, economic and social principles involved,
to serve as a sufficient foundation for advancement in any branch
of the work that the student may enter after graduation. Sufficient
specialized training is given in draughting, assaying and mine
surveying to equip the student for the actual job which he is likely
to enter upon graduating.
Laboratory equipment is sufficient to give a thorough laboratory
drilling in Assaying, Ore Dressing, Pyrometry and Metallurgical
Analysis.
Coal, Iron and Steel are covered in general courses and
specialization is chiefly in non-ferrous mining and metallurgy, with
particular reference to British Columbia conditions.
Students are expected to spend their vacations in practical
work in connection with mining or metallurgy and are required
to do so between the fourth and fifth year as an essential part of
their course, without which a degree will not be granted.
Vancouver is conveniently located in proximity to coal and
metal mining districts, and is an important mining centre. Students Courses m Applied Science
161
and graduates have normally little trouble in getting positions,
through the generous co-operation of the mining companies in the
Province.
Students  are  advised  to  become student  members  of  the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
VIII.   Metallurgical Engineering
Fourth Year
Subject
S"
a?
First Term
El
1
an v
5«
Second Term
11
2 s*
111
Essay   -	
CE. 9 Elem. Design.	
CE. 10 Str. of Materials.
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
CE. 18 Mapping	
MJS. 6 (b) Laboratory...
Geol. 2 Mineralogy.	
E.E. 1 General	
Min. 1 Metal Mining	
Ore Dressing 1 General...
Met 1 General	
Met. 5 Fire Assay	
Met 6 Wet Assay	
149
183
183
184
184
202
196
205
209
212
211
211
211
2
2
3
2
2
1
3
8
'"8
2
2
2
2
3
2
2
8
8
8
8
8
2
2
Fifth Year
tSubject to changes in 1935-36.
$1936-36 only.
a..
Qft.
First Term
Second Term
Subject
4
frfe
■si*
5a
-'ft.
IS
Essay  	
Geol. 9 Mineralography. -	
Geol. 8 Economic ■	
CE. 18 Engr. Economics _.
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory	
Min. 8 Metal Mining _	
Met 2 Smelting... „ „
149
198
197
185
179
212
210
211
211
211
212
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
3
9
9
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
8
9
tMet. 8 Calculations	
Met 4 Analysis	
9
tOre Dressing 1	 162
Faculty of Applied Science
IX.   Mining Engineering
„   Fourth Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering.   (See Page 161.)
Fifth Year
3|
as
II
First Term
Second Term
Subject
ii
El
VL
■§§*
5a
Essay	
149
Geol. 7 Petrology	
197
2
4
2
4
Geol. 8 Economic	
198
3
1
3
1
CE. 18 Engr. Economics	
185
2
2
Met. 2 Smelting	
211
2
2
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory	
212
9
9
Min. 2 Coal and Placer	
209
2
2
Min. 3 Metal Mining	
210
2
2
Min. 4 Machinery	
210
2
2
Min. 5 Surveying	
210
1
Min. 7 Methods	
210
1
Min. 6 Design K..^*
210
3
3
+Ore   Dressing   1	
212
1
i
tl935-36 only.
Short Courses in Mining
In place .of the short daytime courses in Mining given at the
University in previous years, Short Courses in Mining Subjects
will be given each year as night classes in connection with the
British Columbia Chamber of Mines and the Vancouver School
Board. Classes are held on Monday and Thursday evenings and
include lectures on Mining, Smelting, Ore Dressing, Geology
and Mineralogy, with practical laboratory work in Mineralogy.
These courses usually begin about November 15th and continue
until the end of February.
The classes are open to prospectors, business men and any
others interested. A fee of $5.00 is charged for the full courses,
and registration should be made at the office of the Chamber of
Mines, 402 Pender St. W., Vancouver, B. C. Correspondence in
regard to the courses and applications for registration, accompanied by fee, should be addressed to the Chamber of Mines. Courses in Applied Science 163
X.   Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—An undergraduate course, combining academic
and professional courses.  (See below.)
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Public Health Nursing.   (See Page 167.)
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing.   (See Page 168.)
4. Nursing D.—A graduate course of one year in Hospital
Administration.   (See Page 168.)
5. A double course for the combined degrees of B.A. and
B.A.Sc. (Nursing).  (See Page 171.)
Registration for these courses will be subject to the general
University Regulations (see Pages 29-33) and to the special requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and
subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the Faculty
may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Combined Undergraduate Course)
This is a Combined Hospital and University Course leading to
the Degree of B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing
of an associated hospital. It is given by the University in cooperation with the Schools of Nursing of associated hospitals,
which means those hospitals that have signified their willingness
to supply the professional part of the course, and have received
the approval of the University Senate for that purpose. Up to
the present time the Vancouver General Hospital is the only
hospital which has entered into association with the University
to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the Department,
are personally fitted for the profession of nursing. In addition
they must satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated
Hospital Schools of Nursing; the individual applicant must make
her arrangements for admission to the associated hospital directly
with the Superintendent of Nurses and in advance of the opening
of the University term.
Nurses who have graduated from a hospital that is in affiliation
with this University or otherwise approved by the Senate, may
be awarded the degree on complying with the following conditions:
1. They shall have matriculated.
2. They shall take, or shall have taken, the full academic training laid down for this course. At least one year of such
training shall be, or shall have been, taken in the University
of British Columbia. 164
Faculty of Applied Science
3. Except under special circumstances, the course shall be
entered upon within two years of the time of graduating
as a nurse.
The aim of the Combined Course is to afford a broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools of Nursing alone,
and thus to build a sound foundation for those who desire to fit
themselves for Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing
or for Public Health Nursing Service.
The First and Second Years (of the Combined Course), or the
First, Second and Third Years (of the Double Course), which are
academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural
subjects and a foundation in the sciences underlying the practice
of nursing. Following these academic, or pre-clinical years, the
student enters an associated Hospital School of Nursing for a
period of thirty-two months. The first four months is a probationary period; upon acceptance by the School of Nursing the
student remains for a period of twenty-eight months. This period
of professional training is planned to afford a wide experience and
training in the care of the sick, and to develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the efficient practice of nursing.
The Final Year (which is the same for the Combined and the
Double Course) affords a choice of three courses, one in Public
Health Nursing (Nursing B), the second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing (Nursing C), and the third in
Hospital Administration (Nursing D). The choice of the third
option can be made only when some years of practice intervene.
First Year (Academic)
Subject
English 1
English 1
(a),
(b)..
Choice of Mathematics
or Latin 1;	
or French 1 	
or History 1, 2 or 4	
Economics 1 	
Chemistry 1 ._	
Biology 1 	
History of Nursing.	
112
112
124
100
128
120
102
94
89
214
First Term
5a
Second Term
n
flu
11s Courses in Applied Science
165
Second Year (Academic)
|l
First Term
Second Term
Subject
SIS
c »
ft.
5a
ft.
$**
5a
Physics 1 or 2..._	
112
138
134
131
88
88
214
3
2
3
4
1
2
2
6
3
2   •
3
4
1
1
2
2
Philosophy 1  (a)	
Bacteriology 1	
Bacteriology 2	
6 >
Elementary Organic Chemistry	
1
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It has been arranged that the students of both the Combined
Course and the Double Course will enter the associated Hospital
along with the regular class of probationers entering the
Hospital in September. The midsummer vacation period was
formerly used for the probationary term, but it is believed that
it will be of benefit to the student to have a vacation before entering
the Hospital, and also an advantage to enter at the same time
as the regular class. The students must meet all admission requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing; among other
requirements, they must have attained such age as is fixed by the
School—in the Vancouver General Hospital School of Nursing the
student must have reached her nineteenth birthday before she may
enter the Hospital.
During this probationary period the student will undergo rigid
examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character
for the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School
of Nursing information upon which to judge the student's qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student
to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined
to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing reserve
the right to reject candidates who do not reach the required
standards.
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years of the Combined Course (or
the Fourth and Fifth Years of the Double Course) will be spent
in practical training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing:
Students in these years are required to register with the University
even though during this portion of the course they are in residence 166 Faculty of Applied Science
at the Hospital. During these professional years students are
subject to the authority and are under the direction of the officers
of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The required professional period is thirty-two months, in which is included the
probationary period of four months. The professional period has
been extended to thirty-two months in order to include periods of
special training in certain affiliated institutions without shortening
the period of general training in the associated Hospital. Full
maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital
authorities may designate are provided, and a yearly vacation is
granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the School
of Nursing. A registration fee may be required by the associated
Hospital.
The following is an outline of the course as given in the
Vancouver General Hospital, which is the only Hospital at present
associated with the University in giving the Combined Course.
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by
members of the medical staff and by qualified nurse instructors:
Introductory Ethics of Nursing; Practical Nursing Procedures;
Personal Hygiene; Anatomy and Physiology; Psychology; Elementary Nutrition and Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica;
Surgical Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting) ; Gynecological Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical
Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding;
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing in
Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion
of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing experience in the following departments:
Medical Operating Room
Surgical Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat
Gynecological Obstetrical
Pediatric and Orthopaedic        Communicable   Diseases   (in-
Observation and Neurological     eluding Tuberculosis)
Infants Diet Kitchen
Out-Patient
In order to give the student an understanding of the tuberculosis situation in the Province, and of the value of sanatorium
treatment, an arrangement has been made between the Vancouver
General Hospital and the Provincial Sanatorium at Tranquille,
and an opportunity will be given to as many of the students as
possible to receive instruction in the nursing care of tuberculosis
in this latter institution, in lieu of the course in the tuberculosis, Courses in Applied Science
167
department of the Hospital. Experience in the care of acute infectious diseases will be given when possible.
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students.
Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from the
students desirous of receiving this course.
The diploma of the Hospital School of Nursing will be granted
at the completion of this period.
Final Year (Academic and Professional)
The Final Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing C,
at the option of the student. If Nursing D is selected, at least
three years of practice must intervene. The selection between
these courses need not be made until registering with the University
for the Final Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University and appropriate field work under the supervision
of the various associated Public Health organizations. This course
leads to a Certificate in Public Health Nursing.
Nursing B
Subject
For Details
Total Hours
Total Hours
See Page:
Lectures
Laboratory
214
34
215
8
215
9
215
*
215
11
215
17
215
4
215
4
215
16
216
51
216
2
216
34
216
17
216
18
216
6
216
2
217
34
217
18
217
18
217
10
To run c<
jncurrently
169
with    the
work.
academic
Preventable Diseases and Epidemiology
Tuberculosis  :	
Mental Hygiene	
Bacteriology	
Infant Welfare '.	
Public Health 	
Public Health Administration	
Public Health Organizations	
Vital Statistics 	
Principles and Practice of Public
Health Nursing	
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme	
Health Education	
Contemporary Nursing Problems	
School Hygiene 	
Social Case Work	
Hospital  Social Service	
Principles of Education	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure 	
Sociology	
Motor Mechanics 	
Field  Work 	 168
Faculty of Applied Science
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for the
observation of Training School administration and ward supervision in associated Hospitals. This course leads to a Certificate
in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing.
Nursing C
Subject
Total Hours
Laboratory
Preventable Diseases and Epidemiology
Mental Hygiene	
Contemporary Nursing Problems...	
Teaching in Schools of Nursing	
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of Nursing 	
Educational Psychology	
Education 14 (a) Principles of Methods
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure 	
Sociology  	
Social Case Work	
Electives from Nursing B or from<
related Science Courses (to make
up three units)	
Field Work
Nursing D  (Hospital Administration)
A graduate course of one academic year which includes work
in the University and opportunity for studying the problems of
ward and hospital administration in associated hospitals. This
course leads to a Certificate in Hospital Administration.
Nursing D
Subject
Preventable Diseases and Epidemiology...
Mental Hygiene _	
Contemporary Nursing Problems	
Nursing Administration	
Hospital Administration.	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure	
Sociology	
Social Case Work	
Electives from Nursing B or C or from
Telated Science courses (to make up
. six units ) .....
Field Work _	
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lectures
Total Hours
Laboratory
214
215
216
217
217
217
217
216
34
9
17
51
34
18
18
6
169 Courses in Applied Science 169
Field Work in Nursing B, C and D
The academic work and *field work will run concurrently
throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the
last weeks of the Second Term, which, in Nursing B, will be
devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in Nursing
C and D to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the
associated Hospitals. Field work for some students may have to
be delayed until after the close of the University year.
During the period spent in the Hospital, or with a Public
Health or Social Welfare organization, all students will be subject
to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers of the
associated Hospital School of Nursing or of the Organization.
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies, arrangements have been made for supervised field work
or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department;
Mrs. Laura B. Gordon, Director.
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young, Provincial Health Officer.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District
Superintendent.        f
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.—
Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director, Department of School Hygiene.       *
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.—Dr.
J. W. Mcintosh, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders, Supervisory
Department of Child Hygiene.
The Children's Aid Society of Vancouver.—Miss Zella Collins,
Manager.
The Family Welfare Bureau of Greater Vancouver. — Miss
Mary McPhedran, Director.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L. Crease,
Medical Superintendent; Miss Hicks, Superintendent of Nurses.
FOR NURSING C AND D
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. A. K. Haywood, Superintendent; Miss Grace Fairley, Superintendent of Nurses.
•That students may have some idea of the probable expenses of the
course, they are reminded that in addition to the usual expenses of a University course, there will be additional expenses in connection with the term
of approximately eight weeks' field work. The sum of one hundred dollars Is
mentioned as probably the maximum amount required to cover the expense
of board and lodging while with the rural nursing organization, and of
transportation. 170 Faculty of Applied Science
Admission to Nursing B, C and D
The courses are open to students of the Combined Course and
of the Double Course, also to nurses who have graduated from
recognized Schools of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in
British Columbia and who are personally fitted for their proposed
work. For Nursing B, applicants shall have received adequate
instruction and practical experience in the nursing care of communicable diseases and of diseases of infancy and childhood. For
Nursing C and D, it is required that applicants shall fulfil the
University educational requirement of Junior Matriculation.
The enrolment of graduate nurses for the certificate course,
Nursing B, may have to be restricted temporarily owing to the
fact that opportunities for Field Work are at present limited.
In the selection of candidates consideration will be given firstly to
residents of the Province, and secondly to those whose preparation
(academic and professional) best fits them for the special branch
for which they wish to register. The certificate courses, Nursing
C and D, will be offered to graduate nurses only upon the enrolment of at least three candidates.
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B, C and D
should be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not later
than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good health
and physical condition, signed by a regular practising physician,
must be presented with the application.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one
month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public
health or social agency approved by the Department. While not
obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field
Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver General
Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian Order of
Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this month in so far
as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made at as early a date
as possible to the Department of Nursing and Health, that arrangement may be made with the Field Agencies; the nurses will be
responsible for their own maintenance, and will receive no
remuneration during this period.
As a preparation for Nursing C graduate nurses are required
to have one year of satisfactory experience as a general duty or
head nurse (or an acceptable equivalent).
As a preparation for Nursing D at least three years of satisfactory experience in a position of responsibility in connection
with a hospital or nursing school is required of graduate nurses
registering for this course. Courses in Applied Science 171
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in
nursing, who wish to take Nursing B, C or D, but are unable to
take a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a
part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses
registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as the
regular-course students.
DOUBLE COURSES FOR THE DEGREES OF
B.A. and B.A.Sc.
I.   Arts and Science, and Nursing:
FmsT Year
Second Year
English 1
English 2
Mathematics 1
Language 2
Language 1
Chemistry 1 or
Physics 1 or 2 or
Physics 1 or 2
Chemistry 1
Zoology 1
Biology 1
Economics 1 or
History of Nursing
History 1 or
± 4   Philosophy 1
Third Year
Bacteriology 1 and 2 4 units
Sociology, Philosophy or Public Health 3 units
Elementary Organic Chemistry 1 unit
Nine additional units to be chosen in accordance with Calendar
regulations, not more than three of which may be chosen from
First and Second Year Subjects. 9 units
Fourth and Fifth Years (Professional)
The degree of B.A. is granted upon completion of the professional years. The diploma from the Hospital School of Nursing
is also awarded.
Final Year
As in the Combined Course—i.e., a choice between the three
courses, Nursing B, Nursing C, and Nursing D. The degree of
B.A.Sc. (Nursing) is granted upon completion of the Final Year.
II.    Arts and Science, and Engineering
Two complete years in Arts and Science and four complete
years in Applied Science are required for a Double Degree. Consequently students must not select courses in Arts and Science
that are included in the Applied Science years, on account of
time-table difficulties. 172 Faculty of Applied Science
The requirements for the first and second years are as set
forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arts (Pages
64-66) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2 and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The passing
grade for each of these subjects and for Algebra, Geometry
and Trigonometry is fifty per cent. (See also, admission to
Applied Science, Page 144.) Students are recommended to
take Mathematics 2 (b)  (calculus).
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Geology 1, Mathematics 2 (a) and
Physics 3 or 5 or 6 (may not be taken except as an extra
subject). These subjects are covered later in Applied
Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering, French
also). Two years in the language elected is necessary to
count towards a degree.
4. Economics 1 may not be taken by those who plan to enter
Chemistry, Chemical Engineering or Civil Engineering.
The third, fourth, fifth and sixth years of the Double Course
correspond to the second, third, fourth and fifth years of Applied
Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing the fifth
year of this course. ^%
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF
M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science
must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation, together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his
course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student
in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a) To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(b) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned):
(i.) To do two or more years of private work under
the supervision of the University, such work to
be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or Examinations and Advancement 173
(ii.) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident
graduate study, the total of such work to be
equivalent to one year of resident graduate
study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis
must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject.
(Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. See
special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters'
Theses.")
The work shall be of post graduate nature and equivalent in
quantity to at least that of the final year. About one-quarter of
the time should be devoted to the minor and the remainder to the
major subject and thesis.
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work,
must be approved by the Head of each of the departments concerned, by the Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean.
Special forms of "Application for a Course Leading to the
Master's Degree" may be obtained from the Registrar's office.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of (1)
History and Principles of Education, and in (2) Educational
Psychology, is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an M.A.Sc.
degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the
Department in which the student wishes to take his Major.
5. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required,
and standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in- the major
subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor.
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar by October 1st. For fees see Pages 34-38.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April. December
examinations will be held in all subjects of the Second and Third
Years, and are obligatory for all students of these. December
examinations in subjects of the Fourth and Fifth Years, excepting
those subjects that are completed before Christmas, shall be
optional with the Departments concerned. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of
the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for
absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented
on the appropriate form which may be obtained from the Dean's
office, or if the illness occurs at the University the student may 174 Faculty of Applied Science
report to the Nurse, Auditorium Building, who may furnish the
necessary certificate.
2. Candidates, in order to pass, must obtain at least 50 per
cent, in each subject (for First Year see Page 147). The grades are
as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second
Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. (See Paras.
12 and 13.) But in the First and Second Years of the course in
Nursing and Health the requirements for passing are the same
as those for the First and Second Years in Arts and Science,
namely:
(a) 50 per cent, or over in each paper, or
(b) 60 per cent, on the total with a minimum of 40 per cent,
in each paper, provided the whole examination is taken at
one time.
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of
any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has
failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted.
A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must be
forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after the
results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant must
state clearly his reasons for making such a request in view of the
fact that the paper of a candidate who makes less than a passing
mark in a subject is read at least a second time before results are
tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination paper
will be granted only with the consent of the Head of the Department concerned.   The fee for re-reading is $2.00.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September 19th,
20th, 21st and 22nd. Special examinations will not be granted,
except by special permission* of the Faculty and on payment of
a fee of $7.50 per paper, and then only during the third week in
October or the second week of January.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees, Pages 34-38) must be
in the hands of the Registrar by August 15th.
6. No student may enter the fourth or higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than
4 units of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examina-
* Special permission of the Faculty is granted only under exceptional
circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Page 146. Examinations and Advancement 175
tion outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year unless
special permission* to do so is granted by Faculty. Students in
Nursing A must remove all outstanding supplemental examinations
before entering their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he
has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all pre-requisite
subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it,
both must be taken in the same session.
8. A student who is required to repeat his year will not be
allowed to take any work in a higher year excepting that a student
who has taken the Field Work of Civil 2 or 7 of the preceding
summer may take Civil 5 or Civil 13 the following session. A
student repeating his year need not repeat, however, any of the
following subjects in which he has made 65 per cent.: Civil Engineering 2, 5, 7, 13, or Mechanical Engineering 1, 2a, 6b or 7 Lab.,
and Geol. 1 (b) and (d) and Mech. 8, 9 and 10 Lab.
9. Any student repeating his year will not be admitted with
any supplementals outstanding.
10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may,
upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate
to withdraw from the University.
11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the
tests and examinations of the first term of the Second or Third
Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation
of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance
at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student
will not be re-admitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding.
12. Term essays and examination papers may be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English.
13. Honours will be granted in any one of the last four years
to students who obtain at least 50 per cent, in each subject and
80 per cent, on the whole at the annual examinations of that year.
14. Honour graduate standing will be granted to those who
obtain honours in the final year and who have passed any one of
the three preceding years with at least 50 per cent, in each subject
and 75 per cent, on the whole.
•Special   permission  of  the  Faculty   is  granted   only  under   exceptional
circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Page 146. 176 Faculty of Applied Science
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the year
as the Senate may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Instructor:: B. M. R. Ashton.
Biology
1. (a) Introductory Biology^—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely
related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships
of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of
labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week.
1. (b) General Biology.—As in Arts.
2. Principles of Genetics.—As in Arts. See Page 90.
3. General Physiology.—As in Arts. See Page 90.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany.
Vol. I., University of Chicago Press.
This course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany except the
Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward Botany may be
obtained through the Evening Course. (See Page 94.)
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per week.
2. Morphology.—As in Arts. See Page 91.
3. Plant Physiology.—As in Arts. See Page 91.
4. Histology.—-A study of the structure and development of
plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining,
mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope, camera
lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-book: Eames and McDaniels, Plant Anatomy, McGraw-
Hill. Botany 177
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification
of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of
British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial
arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds and poisonous plants.
Methods of control.
Prerequisite:  Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson,
University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and
Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First Term.
5. (b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the
United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on
the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution,
relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Mortan & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of the
Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C;
Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F.
Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work per week.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—As in Arts.  See Page 92.
6. (6) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of
the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites
of forests.
Text-book:  Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week
during one-half of one term.
6. (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary) .—A course dealing with
basic concepts of plant disease.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week.  Second Term.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography—The inter-relations of
forests and their environment; the biological characteristics of
important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions;
physiography. 178 Faculty op Applied Science
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World,
McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University
Press.
One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and
laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours,
one period per week.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
1. General Chemistry.—The course comprises a general survey
of the whole field of Chemistry and is designed on the one hand
to provide a thorough groundwork for further study in the
sciences and on the other to give an insight into the methods of
chemical investigation, the fundamental theories and some important applications, such as are suitable to the needs of a cultural
education. Students must reach the required standard in both
lecture and laboratory work.
Text: Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929
Edition, The Century Co. For the Laboratory: Harris and Ure,
Experimental Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.
Three lectures and two and one-half hours laboratory a week.
3 units
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks of the
term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the
laboratory work.
Text-book:   A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
For reference: F. W. Millar, Elementary Theory of Qualitative
Analysis, Century Co.
Prerequisite:  Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Willard and Furman, Quantitative Analysis, Van
Nostrand.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week.
Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation and a Chemistry 179
description of the more important groups of compounds in both
the fatty and the aromatic series.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gattermann-Wieland, Laboratory Methods of Organic
Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week.
4. (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course in the
development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study
of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical
conductivity, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-
Hill.
References: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan. For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry,
Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physical-
Chemical Principles, Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in
Physics). Honor students majoring in Chemistry should take
Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.        3 units.
4. (o) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with the
omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will include
the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week.
First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis. — The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks, as
well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week.
Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be considered
in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neigh- 180 Faculty of Applied Science
bourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by
specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisite:   Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures per week.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of gases,
properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and
thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, OutUnes of Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles, Macmillan;
for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physico-
Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical
Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.        3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.— j
(a) As in Arts.   (See Page 97.)
(b) Electric furnaces, electrolytic refining and deposition of
metals will be studied in detail.
Text-book: Thompson, Theoretical and Applied Electrochemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts.   (See Page 97.)
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts.   (See Page 97.)
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—As in Arts.   (See Page 97.)
16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators; chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and practice
of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box filters, filter
presses, centrifugals, etc.  Principles of counter current extraction.
Prerequisites:  Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: Walter, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of Chemical
Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering,
McGraw-Hill; Badger, Elements of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. Civil Engineering 181
The following firms have kindly permitted the students in
Chemical Engineering to work one day a week in their plants as
part of their practical training:
British Columbia Electric Railway Co. (Gas Department).
Sherwin-Williams Co. of Canada, Limited.
Royal Crown Soaps, Limited.
Imperial Oil Company, Limited.
B. C. Refractories, Limited.
Triangle Chemical Company, Limited.
Westminster Paper Mills.
Canadian Carbonate, Limited.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—As in Arts.   (See Page 98.)
(Given in 1935-36 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page
98.)
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
21. Chemical Kinetics.—-As in Arts.   (See Page 98.)
(Given in 1936-37 and alternate years.)
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor: „_ 	
Associate Professor: F. A. Wilkin.
Associate Professor:
Assistant Professor: A. H. Finlay.
Assistant Professor: A. Lighthall.
Instructor: E. S. Pretious.
Instructor: Archie Peebles.
Instructor: A. Hrennikoff.
1. Descriptive Geometry.—Geometrical drawing, orthographic,
isometric and axometric projections.
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition,
Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Peebles, Mr. Pretious, Mr. Hrennikoff.
2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems
involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit and
level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys. Levels
for profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for twenty
days, or equivalent.
Mr. Pretious, Mr. Peebles, Mr. Hrennikoff.
4. Graphical Statics.—Elementary theory of structures; composition   of  forces;   general  methods   involving  the  force  and 182 Faculty of Applied Science
equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions,
centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed structures,
cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses. Algebraic check
methods will be used throughout.
Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic Statics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 6 must either precede or accompany
Civil 4.
One two-hour period per week.   Mr. Peebles, Mr. Pretious.
5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2.
Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and
topographical maps in convention or color.
Prerequisite:  Civil 2.
One three-hour period per week.  Mr. Pretious.
6. Surveying 1.—Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use of the transit, level, compass, stadia,
minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph; levelling;
topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves; vertical
curves; transition curves.
Prerequisite:   Civil 2, Math. 1.
Text-books: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying, Vol. I.,
Wiley.  Field Office Tables, Allen.
References: Allen, Curves and Earthwork; Sullivan, Spiral
Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per. week.  Mr. Lighthall.
7. Field Work 2.— (a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography,
cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and
vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work
for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs.
(b) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of riverbed by sounding and fixing position by transits and sextants; the
three-point problem; steam-gauging by surface and deep floats and
by the current meter.
(c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth;
adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and
minor instruments.
Prerequisite:   Civil 2 and Civil 6.
Time, same as for Civil 2.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Finlay.
8. Foundations and Masonry.— (a) Borings; bearing power of
soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; retaining walls; estimates
of quantities and costs. Civil Engineering 183
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 10 must either precede or be taken
concurrently.
Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.  First Term.
Mr. Hrennikoff.
(b) Theory of Earth Pressure; combined stresses, ellipse of
stress, principal and conjugate axes, as applied to the determination of earth pressures; Rankine's, Coulomb's, Weyrauch's, Cain's
and Rebhann's theories and solutions for earth pressure; retaining
walls; dams.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 8 (a) must be taken with 8 (b)
during the First Term.
References: Ketchum, Walls, Bins and Grain Elevators; Howe,
Retaining Walls for Earth; Cain, Earth Pressure, Walls and Bins;
Morley, Theory of Structures.
One lecture per week each term.   Mr. Hrennikoff.
9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating
designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities and
costs; preparation of plans.
Text-books:   Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary
Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co.
Prerequisite:  First Term of Civil 10.
One lecture and one three-hour period.   Second Term.
Mr. Hrennikoff.
10. Strength of Materials.—(a) A thorough introduction to
the fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials;
stress, deformation, elasticity ana resilience; the application of
the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear,
moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection
of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any loading;
riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses; longitudinal
shear; reinforced concrete; special beams.
(b) Laboratory. — Proportioning of concrete and testing of
cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the
strength and elasticity of these materials.
About one-half of the laboratory time will be set aside for the
solution of problems in investigation and design.
Text-book:  Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials, Wiley.
References: Swain, Strength of Materials; Morley, Strength of
Materials.
Prerequisites:   Physics 6, Civil 4 and 31. 184 Faculty of Applied Science
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Hrennikoff.
Note:—The laboratory testing is performed in the Forest
Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent
Brown and Mr. Hrennikoff.
11. Transportation 1. Railways. — The inception of railway
projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon
operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher grades; adjustment of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway
economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines.
Prerequisite: Civil 6 and 7.
Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location, Wiley.
References: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-
Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of Railways,
Wiley.
Two lectures per week.  Mr. Wilkin^
12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.—(a) Fundamental principles
and their application. Problems on gauges, pressure on surfaces.
Bernouilli's theorem, flow through orifices, short tubes, weirs* pipes,
and open channels, and the dynamic action of jets.
(b) Laboratory period includes experimental work on gauges,
pipes, weirs, orifices, short tubes and stream measurements.
Prerequisite:  Physics 6.
Text-book:   Russell, Hydraulics, Holt, 4th edition.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Pretious.
13. Mapping 2.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 7;
railway location and hydrographie surveys; topographic maps
from photographic plates.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Pretious.
14. Surveying 2.—(a) A continuation of Civil 6. Theory and
use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise instruments; plane-
table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo-topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys.  First Term.
(6) Field Astronomy.  Second Term.
Text-book:  Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II., Wiley.
References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of
Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and
Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical
Astronomy, Ginn and Co.; Manual of Surveys of Dominion Lands;
Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors.
Prerequisite:   Civil 6.
Two lectures per week.  Mr. Lighthall. Civil Engineering 185
15. Perspective Drawing and Map Projections.—(a) Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and struc-
tures. First Term.
(6) Map Projections.  Second Term.
Prerequisite:  Civil!.
Text-books:  Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie & Son;
Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by solar and
stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling.
; Prerequisite: Civil 7.
Time, same as for Civil 2.  Mr. Lighthall.
17. Structural Design 2.—Selection of types of bridges; determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional forms
and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses, steel
trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams and
retaining walls; complete drawings.
Text-books: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill;
Jacoby and Davis, Timber Design and Construction, Wiley & Sons.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vol. III., Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering,
McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion.
Prerequisites:  Civil 8, 9 and 10.
One lecture and two one-hour periods per week. First Term.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Second
Term. V
Mr. Hrennikoff.       mw
18. Engineering Economics. — (a) A general treatment of
sinking funds; yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating;
economic selection, reports.
Text-book: Fish, Engineering Economics, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites:  Economics 1.
Two lectures per week.   First Term.  Mr. Wilkin.
(6) Principles of financing; forms of business enterprises;
stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business finance;
capital and interpretation of financial statements.
References: Fish, Engineering Economics, 2nd Edition;
Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law; Lough, Business
Finance.
Two lectures per week.  Second Term.  Mr. Wilkin.
19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary; as
a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders; specifi- 186 Faculty of Applied Science
cations; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and
certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance
and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards;
specification and contract writing.
Text-book: Kirby, Elements of Specification Writing, Wiley
& Sons.
References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of
Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable
&Co.
One lecture per week.  Mr. Pretious.
20. Surveying 3. — Geodesy; the determination of azimuth,
longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of
baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions
of observations; precise levelling.
References:  Hosmer, Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Publications of Geodetic Survey, Ottawa.
Prerequisite:  Civil 14. ^ J
One lecture per week.   Mr. Lighthall.
21. Hydraulic Engineering 2.—Waterpower engineering; rainfall, run-off, stream flow; investigation of power problems; selection
of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power; mass
curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and reaction
wheels; methods of control and operation of various forms of
machines; transmission of hydraulic power.
Text-book: Mead, Water-power Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
References: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Vol. I.,
Blackie; Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or be taken concurrently.
One lecture per week both terms, and fifteen hours in laboratory
second term.   Mr. Wilkin.
22. Municipal Engineering.—Sewerage and Sewage Disposal.
General methods and economic consideration; quantity and runoff; design of sewers, man-holes, flush tanks, etc.; construction
methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and
management.
Sewage Disposal: Physical, chemical, biological and economical
aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening, sedimentation,
filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management costs.
References: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal,
3 Vols., McGraw-Hill.
Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity,
quality and pressure required; pumping machinery; storage;
aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification sys- Civa, Engineering 187
terns; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials, estimates and
designs; construction methods and costs.
Reference: Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook,
McGraw-Hill.
Town Planning;covering the economical and artistic development of a city, city management. Street cleaning and disposal of
waste; composition and quantity of city wastes; collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration and reduction;
costs and returns.
Reference:  Lewis, City Planning, Wiley.
Prerequisite:  Civil 12.
Two lectures and one two-hour period per week.
23. Transportation 2.—(a) Railways. Organization and rules
of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools; track work;
work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and accounts;
expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines, yards and
terminals; maximum capacity of single track.
Prerequisite:  Civil 11.
Two lectures per week.  First Term.  Mr. Peebles.
(b) Highways.—Highway economics, surveys and locations;
grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods;
designs and estimates.
Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction, maintenance and repairs.
Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook.
Prerequisite:   Civil 11. .
Two lectures per week, Second Term.   Mr. Peebles.
24. (a) Mechanics of Materials.—A continuation of Civil 10,
Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least
Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in
beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical
sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis and
design of reinforced concrete rigid frames and arches.
Text-book: Cross & Morgan, Continuous Frames of Reinforced
Concrete, Wiley.
References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced
Concrete, Vol. III.; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design of Concrete
Structures, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:   Civil 10. 188 Faculty of Applied Science
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Finlay.
24. (b) Reinforced Concrete Design.—Intended to familiarize
the student with the basic principles involved in the design of
reinforced concrete structures, including beams, columns, continuous girders and flat slabs, and to form a foundation for the
more advanced work encountered in C.E. 24.
Text-book: Turneaure and Maurer, Principles of Reinforced
Concrete Construction, 4th Edition, John Wiley.
References: Taylor, Thompson and Smulski, Concrete, Plain
and Reinforced, Vol. I., Wiley, 4th Edition.
Prerequisite: C.E. 10.
One lecture and one two-hour period per week.   First Term.
Mr. Finlay.
25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of framed structures
under dead and live loads; distortion of framed structures; the
use of influence lines for analysis of stresses; hinged and hingeless
arches; secondary stresses and redundant members.
Text-book:   Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vols. I. and II., Wiley; Hool and Kinne, Framed Structures, McGraw-Hill; Morley, Theory of Structures, Longmans,
Green & Co.
Prerequisite:   Civil 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Finlay.
26. Class Excursions.—Members of the Fifth Year class in*
Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor, will
visit such factories, industrial developments, public works, docks,
shipyards and important examples of engineering construction as
are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the application
and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden his vision of the
engineering field.  Written reports of trips are required.
Note:—In periods where no trips are taken, tests of hydraulic
machines will be made in the Hydraulic Laboratory. (See Civil
29.)
27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected
topics; analysis of engineering projects; experimental or theoretical
investigations. Topics may be selected from divisions of the Civil
Engineering Course: Geodetics, Railways, Hydraulics, Municipal,
Highways, Economic and Business Engineering, Structures. Copy
of thesis in regular form and binder must be filed with the Department. CrvrL Engineering 189
28. Seminar.—Written and oral discussion of articles appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the various
engineering societies, also reviews of important papers in engineering periodicals; reports on local engineering projects visited
in Civil 26; written outlines must be prepared for all oral reports;
training in technical writing and public speaking.
Required of all Fourth and Fifth Year students in Civil
Engineering.
Reference:   Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill.
One hour per week.
29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and
design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton
and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations,
plant design and operation.
Laboratory work, testing hydraulic machines, arranged for
periods when no trips are taken.   (See Civil 26.)
Prerequisite:  Civil 12.
Text-book: Daugherty, Hydraulic Turbines, 3rd Edition, Mct
Graw-Hill.
References: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering, Vol. I.;
Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead,
Water Power Engineering, 2nd Edition, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
30. Engineering Problems 1.—Training in methods of attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in
proper methods of work and study, including drill in systematic
arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The content is
based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics
and engineering.
Prerequisite:   First Year Arts, or Senior Matriculation.
Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, 2nd Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Two two-hour periods per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Pretious, Mr.
Peebles, Mr. Hrennikoff.
31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering
Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the principal
divisions of Mathematics given in the Second and Third Years of
Applied Science, drawn from the field of mechanics, surveying;
draughting and engineering.
Prerequisites:  Civil 30, Math. 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Text-book:    Duckering,  Notes   and  Problems,  2nd   Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Hrennikoff. 190 Faculty of Applied Science
50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with
drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation,
simple structures and surveying. Adapted to the needs of students
in Agriculture.
One lecture per week.  Mr. Lighthall.
Department of Economics
Professor: H. F, Angus.
Professor: W. A. Carrothers.   (On leave of absence.)
Associate Professor: J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor: C. W. Topping.
Associate Professor: G. F. Drummond.
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of general
economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value,
prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly,
taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and
trusts, etc.
Text-books: Slichter, Modern Economic Society, Holt; Cole,
Intelligent Man's Guide Through World Chaos, Ryerson; The
Canada Year Book, 1934.
Three lectures per week. *^
Department of Forestry
Professor:	
Associate Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp.
Assistant: George S. Allen.
Honorary Lecturers:
R. M. Brown.
William Byers.
Edward W. Bassett.
George H. Barnes.
Albert E. Beaulieu.
1. General Forestry.—Economics of forestry; forest distribution, influences and uses.   A general survey of forestry.
Text-book: Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley,
2nd Edition.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-Hill; A National
Plan for American Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.   Various government publications.
2. Mensuration.—(a) Scaling and measurement of felled
timber products; cruising and stumpage appraisal.
Text-book: Chapman and Demeritt, Elements of Forest Mensuration, J. B. Lyon. Forestry 191
Reference books: Rapraeger, Log Scaling and Grading Practice in the Douglas Fir Region, Pacific Northwest Forest Experiment Station, Portland, Oregon. Instructions for Forest Surveys,
King's Printer, Victoria, B. C. Instructions for Appraising
Stumpage on National Forests, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C.
One lecture and one period of two hours field or laboratory
work per week. One week field work immediately after April
examinations.   Fourth Year.
(6) Measurement of growth of trees and forests. Preparation
of volume, growth, and yield tables.
Text-book: Bruce and Schumacher, Forest Mensuration, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours lecture or laboratory period per week.   Fifth year.
3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organization for prevention and control.
Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western Forestry
and Cbnservation Association, Portland.
Reference books:  Various government publications.
One lecture per week.  Second Term.
5. Wood Technology.—The structure of wood; the identification
of different woods and their qualities and uses; wood seasoning;
wood preservation; emphasis on the Canadian woods of commercial
importance.
Text-book: Record, Identification of the Timbers of Temperate
North America, Wiley.
Reference books: Brown and Panshin, Identification of the
Commercial Timbers of the United States, McGraw-Hill; Forsaith,
The Technology of New York State Timbers, Technical Publication No. 18, New York State College of Forestry, Syracuse, .New
York; Koehler, The Properties and Uses of Wood, McGraw-Hill;
Koehler and Thelen, Kiln Drying of Lumber, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week;
First Term; one lecture and one period of two hours laboratory
per week, Second Term.
6. (o) Forest Management 1.—The principles and methods of
organizing forest areas for sustained yield management on an
economic basis. Normal forest, increment, rotation, regulation of
cut, theory of working plans.
Text-book: Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Tuttle,
Morehouse and Taylor.
Reference books: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, Ann Arbor,
Michigan.   Recknagel, Bentley and Guise, Forest Working Plans, 192 Faculty of Applied Science
Wiley,   2nd   Edition.    Schlich,   Forest  Management,  Bradbury
Agnew.
One lecture per week. Fourth Year.
6. (6) Forest Management 2.—The practical application of the
principles of forest management. Methods of developing working
plans in Europe, in America, and in British Columbia.
Reference books: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, Ann Arbor,
Michigan. Instructions for Forest Surveys, King's Printer, Victoria, B. C. Trevor and Smythies, Practical Forest Management,
Government Press, Allahabad.   Various government publications.
One lecture per week.   Fifth Year.
7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration.—The development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest resources
and industries; policy, legislation and education.
Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University of
Toronto Press, 2nd Edition. Schlich, Forest Policy in the British
Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Ise, The United States Forest Policy,
Yale University Press.   Various government publications.
Two lectures per week.  First Term.
8. Silviculture.—The principles and methods of caring for
forests and of growing timber crops. Seed testing, nursery practice, planting, thinning and improvement cuttings, slash disposal.
Text-books: Baker, The Theory and Practice of Silviculture,
McGraw-Hill; Tourney and Korstian, Seeding and Planting in the
Practice of Forestry, Wiley; Troup, Silvicultural Systems, Oxford
University Press.   I
Reference books: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley, 2nd
Edition; Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew; various government publications.
Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of three
hours field or laboratory work during the Second Term.
9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles and
practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions of North
America.
Text-book:   Brown, Logging Principles and Practices, Wiley.
Reference books: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, 2nd Edition; various
government publications.
Two lectures per week.   First Term.
One lecture per week.  Second Term.
10. Logging   Engineering.—An   intensive   study   of   logging
systems and operations in the forests of western North America.
Text-book:  Brandstrom, Analysis of Logging Costs and Operating Methods in the Douglas Fir Region, Charles Lathrop Pack
Forestry Foundation, Washington, D. C. Forestry 193
Reference books: Various articles in The Timberman, B. C.
Lumberman, and other trade journals and government publications.
One lecture per week.  First Term.
Two lectures per week.  Second Term.
One period of four hours laboratory or field work per week,
alternating with Forestry 11 and 12.
11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America.
Text-book:   Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the Douglas
Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American Lumber
Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine
Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of
Documents, Washington, D. C. Seeley, Small Sawmills, U. S. D. A.
Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or
field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10.  First Term.
12. Forest Products and Marketing.—A study of marketing
methods and problems of the lumber trade—domestic consumption
and export—markets in foreign countries; also of other forest
industries, including pulp and paper, shingles, veneers, boxes.
Text-books: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and
Use, Wiley, 2nd Edition.   Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Brown, The American Lumber Industry,
Wiley. Joint authorship, The Manufacture of Pulp and Paper,
Vols. III. to V., McGraw-Hill. Knight and Wulpi, Veneers and
Plywood, Ronald Press Co.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or
field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10.  Second Term.
13. Lumber Grading.—An intensive study of the grading, tallying and shipping of Pacific Coast lumber products for domestic
and export markets.
Text-book: Beaulieu and Barton, Applied Lumber Science,
B. C. Lumber and Shingle Manufacturers' Association, Vancouver, B. C.
One lecture and one period of three hours field work per week.
Second Term.
14. Seminar. — Oral presentation and discussion of current
forestry topics and reviews of important papers in forestry periodicals, also reports of field trips in connection with F.E. 10, 11
and 12; written outlines must be prepared; training in technical
writing and public speaking.
One hour per week. 194 Faculty of Applied Science
15. Forestry Thesis.—Research in some phase of forestry which
is of particular interest to the student. The project must be
approved by the Department and a copy of the thesis in regular
form and binder must be filed with the Department not later than
the end of the spring examination period.
Three hours per week throughout the year.
Vancouver Laboratory
Forest Products Laboratories of Canada,
Forest Service,
Department of the Interior, Canada
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Superintendent.
R. S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Engineer.
Division of Timber Mechanics
J.  B.  Alexander,  B.Sc.   (New  Brunswick),  Chief,  Timber  Mechanics'
Division.
J. T. Lee, Timber Tester.
D. S. Wright, Timber Tester.
W. W. Davidson, Assistant Timber Tester.
R. J. Eades, Assistant Timber Tester.       a< 4
Division of Timber Products
J. H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc.  (Brit. Col.), Chief, Timber Products Division.
H. W. Eades, B.ScF. (Washington), Assistant Timber Pathologist.
F. W. Guernsey, B.A.Sc'. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in Timber Products.
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada is a research
organization maintained by the Forest Service of the Department
of the Interior, Canada. Research in forest products is carried
on in two laboratories, one in Ottawa and the other in Vancouver,
while all questions relating to pulp and paper research are dealt
with by a co-operative laboratory established at McGill University,
Montreal, through an arrangement between the Forest Products
Laboratories of Canada, the Canadian Pulp and Paper Association,
and McGill University.
The Vancouver laboratory was established in 1918 and has
been maintained in association with the University of British
Columbia since that time. Originally equipped only for the
mechanical testing of western woods, the organization has shown
a rapid expansion and now includes research in all branches of
timber mechanics, lumber seasoning investigations, timber decay
problems, mill studies, waste utilization, wood identification, etc.
One of the most important phases of the work of the laboratory
is its technical service to all branches of the timber industry in the
dissemination of information on a wide variety of subjects having
to do with forest products.  While research in wood preservation, Geology 195
wood distillation, container tests, pulp and paper, etc., is at present
confined to the Ottawa and Montreal laboratories, the close contact
maintained between the three organizations permits the extension
of this technical service to include such subjects as wood utilization of all kinds, wood preservation, wood distillation, pulp and
paper, new industries, etc.
A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation is maintained
between the Laboratory and the University, whereby students, of
the University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the
Laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the
apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff of
the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library
and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related
work.
•
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock (on leave of absence).
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Lecturer in Mineralogy and Petrography: H. V. Warren.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to
the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the
lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, work of the wind,
ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions,
metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits.
Two lectures per week.   First Term.   Mr. Williams.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including the
study and identification of the most common minerals and rocks,
the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the
study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield
Mr. Williams, and Mr. Warren.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quaternary
eras.
Two lectures per week.   Second Term.   Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting of
the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations,
their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence in
the strata.
Two hours laboratory per week.   Second Term.   Mr. Williams. 196 Faculty of Applied Science
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take
the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighbourhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures:
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1 or 2 taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Longwell, Knopf, Flint and Schuchert, Outlines of
Physical and Historical Geology, Wiley.
Students will be1 required to make a passing mark in both the
combined written and the combined practical divisions of the
course. 3 units.
2. (o) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with special
reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal
forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy
and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite:  Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week.
First Term. Mr. Warren.
2. (6) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—This course
supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey of
Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a critical
study of about 60 of the less common minerals, special emphasis
being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite:  Geology 2 (a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week.
Second Term.  Mr. Warren.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography of
British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt. Geology 197
Prerequisite:   Geology 1.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Schofield. 3 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study of
the earth and the development of the geological sciences, Mr.
Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regiona